BeneHeart D6

Defibrillator/Monitor

Operator’’s Manual
Operator Manual
© 2009-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
For this Operator’s
Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2012-11.

I
Intellectual Property Statemen
Statementt
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property
rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyright or
patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential informa
information.
tion. Disclosure of the information in
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction,

reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other derivative work of this
manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

, , and are the trademarks, registered or otherwise,

otherwis e, of

Mindray in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational
or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.

II
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance,
performance, or use of this
manual.

Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
if :

 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by
Mindray authorized personnel;

 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local
requirements;and

 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

WARNING
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.

 It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.

III
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY
WARRANTY IS EXCL
EXCLUSIVE
USIVE AND IIS
S IN LIEU OF ALL O
OTHER
THER W
WARRANTIES,
ARRANTIES, EXPRESS
EXPRESSED
ED OR IMPLI
IMPLIED,
ED, INC
INCLUDING
LUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions

Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability
for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or
the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized
personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to

to::

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service people.

 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.

 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial

park,Nanshan,Shenzhen 518057,P
518057,P.R.China
.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mi
service@mindray.com.cn
ndray.com.cn

Te
Tel:l: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680

EC-Representative:
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH (Europe)

Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany

Te
Tel:l: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726

IV
Preface

Manual Purpose
This manual contains
contains the instructions necessary to ope
operate
rate the product safely and in accordance
accordance with its function
function and
intended use. Observance of this manual is a prerequ
prerequisite
isite for proper product performance and correct operation and
ensures patient and operator safety.

This manual is based on the maxim

maximum
um config
configuration
uration and therefore
therefore some contents
contents may not
not apply to your
your product. If
you have any question, please contact us.

This manual is an integral

integral part of the product. It sshould
hould alway
alwayss be kept close to the equipment
equipment so tha
thatt it can be
obtained conveniently when needed.

Intended Audience
This manual is geared
geared for clinical profe
professionals
ssionals who are expected to ha
have
ve a wor
working
king knowledge of medical
medical proc
procedures,
edures,
practices and terminology as required for monitoring of critically ill patients.

Illustrations
All illustrations in this manual serve as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect the setup or data displayed on
your equipment.

Conventions
 Italic text is used in this manual to quote the referenced chapte
chapters
rs or sections.

 [ ] is used to enclose screen texts.

 → is used to indicate operational procedure

procedures.
s.

V
FOR YOUR NOTES

VI
Contents
1 Safety..................................
Safety.........................................................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................
......1-1
1-1
1.1 Safety Information ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................... ..................................................................................................................................
....................................................................
...... 1-1
1.1.1 Dangers ..............................................................................................................................
............................................................. ................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
...... 1-2
1.1.2 Warnings ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
....................................................................
..... 1-2
1.1.3 Cautions .............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ..............................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
...... 1-3
1.1.4 Notes .....................................................
.........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................ 1-3
1.2 Equipment Symbols ..........................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 1-4

2 The Basics ....................

..........................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................................
............................................
...................................
.............2-1
2-1
2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................. 2-1
2.2 Intended Use......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 AED............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 Manual Defibrillation.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.3 Noninvasive Pacing............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.4 ECG............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.5 Resp .........................................................
...........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................ 2-2
2.2.6 SpO2 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.7 NIBP........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.8 Temp......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.9 IBP.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.10 CO2 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Main Unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.1 Front View............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2 Side View................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.3 Rear View...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-10
View...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.4 External Paddles.................................................................................................................................................................................2-11
Paddles.................................................................................................................................................................................2-11
2.4 Display Views.......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-12
Views.......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-12

3 Basic Operations and Settings.............................................

Settings...................................................................
............................................
.............................................
............................................
.....................3-1
3-1
3.1 Installation ...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. .....................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................
.......... 3-1
3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking ...............................................................................................................................
......................................................... ........................................................................................................
.................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Environme
Environmental
ntal Requirem
Requirements
ents ..............................................................
...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................
.......................... 3-2
3.2 Basic Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Turning Power On................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 Starting Monitoring or Therapy...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Disconnecting from Power............................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4 Auto Restoring to Last Configuration........................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Using the Main Menu......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Changing General Settings.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4.1 Setting the Date and Time................................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.4.2 Adjusting the Screen Brightness.................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4.3 Changing Key Volume........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4

1
 3.4.4 Selecting High C
Contrast
ontrast Mode .......................................................
..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................
............................. 3-4
3.4.5 Adjusting Waveform
Waveform P
Position...........................................................
osition..............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................ 3-4
3.5 Analog Output .........................................................
..............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................
........ 3-4

4 Managing Patients...........
Patients.................................
............................................
...........................................
...........................................
...............................................
...............................................
............................
...... 4-1
4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Editing Patient Information............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1

5 Alarms.........................
Alarms...............................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
............................................
...........................................
....................................
.............. 5-1
5.1 Alarm Categories................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Alarm Levels.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Alarm Indicators ............................................................................................................................
.......................................................... ......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 Alarm Lamps ........................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 5-2
5.3.2 Audible Alarms..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.3 Alarm Message..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.4 Flashing Numeric................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.4 Alarm Tone Configuration................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.4.1 Changing the Alarm Volume........................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4.2 Setting the Interval between Alarm Sounds............................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu....................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.5.1 Setting Alarm Properties for All Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Lim
Limits
its Automa
Automatically
tically .....................................................................................................................................
................................................................ .........................................................................
.... 5-5
5.6 Pausing Alarms ..........................................................
.............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................
........ 5-8
5.7 Switching Alarms Off ....................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
................................................ 5-8
5.8 Pausing Alarm Sounds ..........................................................
.........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
............................................................. 5-9
5.9 Switching Off Alarm Sounds........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.10 Reminder Tones................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.11 Latching Alarms ........................................................
.........................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
.......5-10
5-10
5.12 Clearing
Clearing Te
Technical
chnical Alarms .............................................................................................................................
.......................................................... .................................................................................................................
.............................................. 5-10
5.13 When an Alarm Occurs
Occurs.....................................................
.......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 5-10

6 Monitoring ECG................
ECG......................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
..............................................
.............................................
............................
...... 6-1
6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Safety....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Monitoring View.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.4 Preparing to Monitor ECG................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.4.1 ECG Monitoring with Electrodes.................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.4.2 ECG Monitoring with Paddles/Pads.............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.4.3 Checking
Checking Paced Status ..................................................
....................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................
.................................................. 6-5
6.5 ECG Display ......................................................
.........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................
................... 6-5
6.6 Changing ECG Settings..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.1 Change Lead Setting.......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.2 Changing ECG Wave Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.3 Switching On
On or Off the N
Notch
otch Filte
Filterr ............................................................
........................................................................................................................................
................................................................................
.... 6-7
6.6.4 Adjusting Heartbeat Volume........................................................................................................................................................... 6-8

2
6.7 Arrhythmia Analysis............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events........................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.7.2 Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off................................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.7.4 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings................................................................................................................................6-10
Settings................................................................................................................................6-10
6.7.5 Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually..............................................................................................................................6-10
Manually..............................................................................................................................6-10
6.7.6 Automatic Arrhythmia Relearn.....................................................................................................................................................6-11
Relearn..................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.8 Calibrating ECG ............................................................
...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................
....6-11
6-11

7 Resting 12-Lead ECG .....................

...........................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
.......................................
.................7-1
7-1
7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................. 7-1
7.2 Placing Electrodes............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3 12-Lead ECG Monitoring................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.1 Entering the 12-lead ECG Sc
Screen
reen .......................................................
.........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................
.......................... 7-2
7.3.2 Recording
Recording Realtim
Realtime
e 12-Le
12-Lead
ad ECG...............................................................
ECG.... ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................
............... 7-2
7.4 12-lead ECG Analysis.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.5 12-Lead Reports................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.1 Reviewing 12-Lead ECG Report...................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.2 Recording
Recording 12-Le
12-Lead
ad EC
ECG
G Report ............................................................................................................................
......................................................... .............................................................................................
.......................... 7-5
7.5.3 Transmitting
Transmitting 12-Lead ECG
ECG Report.........................................................
Report........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
.......................... 7-5
7.6 Changing 12-Lead ECG Settings.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.6.1 Setting Tachy
Tachy and Brady T
Threshold.......................
hreshold......................................................................................
........................................................................................................................
......................................................... 7-7
7.6.2 Setting
Setting V3 Pla
Placement
cement................................................................
............................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
............................................. 7-8
7.6.3 Selecting QTc
QTc Formula
Formula .....................................................
........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
............................................... 7-8
7.6.4 Setting Baseline C
Correction
orrection Filter ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................ ..................................................................................
............ 7-8
7.6.5 Setting Patient
Patient Info
Information
rmation Input P
Prompt
rompt ..........................................................
............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................
..... 7-9
7.6.6 Setting 12-Lead ECG Report Content........................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.6.7 Setting 12-Lead ECG Format............................................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.6.8 Setting
Setting up Destination Sites ............................................................
.........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................
.................................7-12
7-12
7.6.9 Setting
Setting Fax Forma
Formatt ......................................................
.....................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................
.......................................................7-12
7-12
7.6.10 Setting up Transmission Speed..................................................................................................................................................7-12
Speed..................................................................................................................................................7-12

8 AED ...................
.........................................
...........................................
...........................................
............................................
.............................................
..............................................
.............................................
........................
..8-1
8-1
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................. 8-1
8.2 Safety ..............................................................................................................................
............................................................ ................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
........................... 8-1
8.3 AED View................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.4 AED Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.5 Shock Advised .................................................................................................................................
............................................................... .................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
...... 8-4
8.6 No Shock Advised (NSA) ........................................................
.........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 8-4
8.7 CPR............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.7.1 CPR Metronome..........................................................................
Metronome............... ...............................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
..................................... 8-5
8.8 AED Sound Recording .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 8-6
8.9 AED Setup .......................................................
.....................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................
........................... 8-6

9 Manual Defibrillation...................
Defibrillation .........................................
............................................
...........................................
.............................................
..............................................
.......................................
.................9-1
9-1
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................. 9-1

3
9.2 Safety....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Manual Defibrillation View ............................................................................................................................
........................................................ ......................................................................................................................
.................................................. 9-3
9.4 Manual Defibrillation Proce
Procedure
dure ........................................................
............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
....................................... 9-3
9.4.1 Using Pediatric Paddles..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.2 Using Internal Paddles....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.5 Synchronize
Synchronized
d Ca
Cardiover
rdioversion
sion ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ........................................................................................................
..................................... 9-6
9.5.1 Performing Synchronized
Synchronized Cardio
Cardioversion....................................................
version.....................................................................................................................
................................................................................
............... 9-7
9.5.2 Delivering Additional S
Synchronize
ynchronized
d Shocks ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
................................................................. 9-7
9.5.3 Disabling the Sync Function............................................................................................................................................................ 9-7
9.6 Remote
Remote Sync
Synchronized
hronized Cardiove
Cardioversion
rsion .........................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
............................. 9-8
9.7 Contact Impedance Indicator......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9

10 Noninvasiv
Noninvasive
e Pacing ...................
..........................................
.............................................
............................................
...........................................
............................................
......................................
............... 10-1
10.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................10-1
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Safety .......................................................
........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
........................... 10-1
10.3 Pacing View.......................................................................................................................................................................................................10-2
View....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.4 Demand Mode ve
versus
rsus Fix
Fixed
ed Mode ..................................................
.....................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................
..................................... 10-3
10.5 Preparing
Preparing for Pacing...............
Pacing...................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
................................... 10-3
10.5.1 Demand Mode Pacing...................................................................................................................................................................10-4
Pacing................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.5.2 Fixed
Fixed Mode Pacing .........................................................................................................................
........................................................ .................................................................................................................
................................................ 10-5

11 Monitoring Resp ....................

..........................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................................
.........................................
................... 11-1
11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Safety .......................................................
........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
........................... 11-1
11.3 Resp View...........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1
View........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.4 Placing Resp Electrodes .................................................................................................................................
............................................................ ...................................................................................................................
.............................................. 11-2
11.4.1 Optimizing Lead
Lead Placeme
Placement
nt for Resp.........
Resp........................................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 11-3
11.4.2 Changing Resp Wave Settings.................................................................................................................................................... 11-3

12 Monitoring PR......................................
PR.............................................................
.............................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................................
..........................
.... 12-1
12.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Entering the PR Setup................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Setting the PR Source....................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
Source.................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.4 Adjusting Pulse Tone
Tone Volume...............................................
Volume.....................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................
................................................ 12-1

13 Monitoring SpO2 ....................

..........................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................................
.........................................
................... 13-1
13.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................13-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Safety .......................................................
........................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
........................... 13-2
13.3 Identifying SpO2 Modules ............................................................................................................................
........................................................... ................................................................................................................
............................................... 13-2
13.4 SpO2 Monitoring Proce
Procedure
dure ............................................................
..................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................
..................................... 13-2
13.5 Changing SpO2 Settings...............................................................................................................................................................................
Settings...............................................................................................................................................................................13-3
13-3
13.5.1 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity................................................................................................................................................................13-3
Sensitivity................................................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.5.2 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the Same Limb.....................................................................................................................
Limb.....................................................................................................................13-3
13-3
13.5.3 Changing Averag
Averaging
ing Time................................................................
Time ...................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................
........................ 13-3
13.5.4 Sat-Seconds
Sat-Seconds Alarm Management .............................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................
.............13-3
13-3
13.5.5 Changing the Speed of the Pleth Wave.................................................................................................................................. 13-4

4
13.6 SpO2 Desat Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
Alarm............................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.7 Pitch Tone...........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
Tone...........................................................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.8 Measurement Limitations............................................................................................................................................................................13-5
Limitations............................................................................................................................................................................13-5
13.9 Masimo Information
Information........................................................
..............................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
........................................................13-6
13-6
13.10 Nellcor Information......................................................................................................................................................................................13-6
Information......................................................................................................................................................................................13-6

14 NIBP ...................
..........................................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
........................................
.................. 14-1
14.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.3 Measurement Limitations............................................................................................................................................................................14-2
Limitations............................................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.4 Measurement Modes.....................................................................................................................................................................................14-2
Modes.....................................................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.5 Measuring Proced
Procedure
ure ..........................................................
............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
........................................................14-2
14-2
14.5.1 Preparing for NIBP Measurement..............................................................................................................................................14-2
Measurement..............................................................................................................................................14-2
14.5.2 Starting and Stopping NIBP Measurements..........................................................................................................................
Measurements..........................................................................................................................14-2
14-2
14.5.3 Correcting the Measurement......................................................................................................................................................14-3
Measurement......................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.5.4 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling.........................................................................................................................................................14-3
Cycling......................................................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.5.5 Starting a STAT Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................14-3
Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.6 Understanding
Understanding the NI
NIBP
BP Num
Numerics
erics ........................................................
........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................
..................................14-3
14-3
14.7 Setting Initial Cuff Inflation P
Pressure
ressure ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................... ........................................................................................
........................14-4
14-4
14.8 Setting
Setting Pressure
Pressure Unit ..............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................
........................................................14-4
14-4

15 Temp .......................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
............................................
...........................................
....................................
.............. 15-1
15.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.2 Understanding
Understanding the Temp
Temp Display
Display......................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................
...................................15-1
15-1
15.3 Making a Temp Measurement....................................................................................................................................................................15-2
Measurement....................................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.4 Setting the Temperature Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................15-2
Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................15-2

16 Monitoring IBP.......................
IBP.............................................
............................................
............................................
..............................................
..............................................
........................................
.................. 16-1
16.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2 Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.3 Zeroing IBP Transducer.................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
Transducer.................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.4 Making an IBP Measurement......................................................................................................................................................................16-2
Measurement......................................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.5 Understanding the IBP Display..................................................................................................................................................................16-3
Display..................................................................................................................................................................16-3
16.6 Changing IBP Settings...................................................................................................................................................................................16-4
Settings...................................................................................................................................................................................16-4
16.6.1 Changing a Pre
Pressure
ssure fo
forr Monitoring
Monitoring.......................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................
...16-4
16-4
16.6.2 Changing IBP Wave Settings ...................................................
.....................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
..................................16-4
16-4
16.6.3 Setting Pressure Unit......................................................................................................................................................................
Unit......................................................................................................................................................................16-4
16-4
16.6.4 Setting IBP Filter...............................................................................................................................................................................16-4
Filter...............................................................................................................................................................................16-4

17 Monitoring Carbon CO2 .....................

............................................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................
...... 17-1
17.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.2 Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1
Safety...................................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.3 Preparing for CO2 Measurement................................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.3.1 Using a Sidestream CO2 Module................................................................................................................................................
Module................................................................................................................................................17-2
17-2
17.3.2 Using a Microstream CO2 Module ......................................................
.....................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................
........................17-2
17-2
17.4 Changing CO2 Settings .......................................................
..................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
...............................................................17-3
17-3

5
 17.4.1 Accessing CO2 Setup Menu.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu.........................................................................................................................................................17-3
17-3
17.4.2 Changing
Changing Ope
Operating
rating Mode ...........................................................
..............................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................
........................... 17-3
17.4.3 Selecting Gas Compensations....................................................................................................................................................17-3
Compensations.................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.4.4 Setting Humidity Compensatio
Compensation
n ...................................................................................................................
..................................................... .........................................................................................
........................... 17-4
17.4.5 Choosing a Time Interval ffor
or Peak
Peak-Picking
-Picking ...........................................................
............................................................................................................................
................................................................. 17-4
17.4.6 Setting the Apne
Apnea
a Alarm Delay .....................................................
......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................
........................... 17-4
17.4.7 Changing CO2 Wave Settings......................................................................................................................................................17-4
Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 17-4
17.4.8 Setting the Auto Standby Time.................................................................................................................................................. 17-4
17.4.9 Setting
Setting Pressure
Pressure Unit .......................................................
.....................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................
................................................ 17-5
17.5 Barometric
Barometric Pr
Pressure
essure C
Compensation....
ompensation..................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................
.................17-5
17-5
17.6 Measuremen
Measurementt Limitations ...........................................................................................................................
......................................................... ..................................................................................................................
................................................ 17-5
17.7 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System..................................................................................................................17-5
System.................................................................................................................. 17-5
17.8 Removing the Exhaust Gases from the System................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.9 Zeroing
Zeroing the Transducer
Transducer ......................................................................................................................
...................................................... ..........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 17-6
17.10 Calibrating
Calibrating tthe
he Transdu
Transducer
cer .....................................................
.......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
................................................ 17-6
17.11 Oridion Information..............
Information.................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
................................... 17-6

18 Marking Events
Events...................
.........................................
.............................................
.............................................
............................................
...........................................
............................................
....................... 18-1

19 Freezing Wav
Waveforms
eforms...................
........................................
...........................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
......................................
............... 19-1
19.1 Freezing
Freezing Wavef
Waveforms
orms ........................................................
...........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
........................................................... 19-1
19.2 Reviewing Frozen Waveforms....................................................................................................................................................................19-1
Waveforms.................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.3 Unfreezin
Unfreezing
g Wavef
Waveforms
orms ..............................................................
.................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................
................................................ 19-2
19.4 Recording
Recording Fro
Frozen
zen W
Waveforms
aveforms ..............................................................
..............................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................
...................................... 19-2

20 Review ...................
........................................
...........................................
............................................
...........................................
............................................
..............................................
......................................
............... 20-1
20.1 Reviewing Events............................................................................................................................................................................................ 20-1
20.2 Reviewing Tabular Trends............................................................................................................................................................................20-2
Trends............................................................................................................................................................................ 20-2
20.3 Reviewing 12-Lead Reports........................................................................................................................................................................20-2
Reports........................................................................................................................................................................ 20-2

21 Data Management....................................
Management..........................................................
............................................
...........................................
............................................
..............................................
....................... 21-1
21.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................21-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.2 Reviewing
Reviewing Patient Events ..........................................................
............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
................................................ 21-2
21.3 Exporting Data.................................................................................................................................................................................................21-2
Data................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21-2

22 Recording
Recording....................
..........................................
...........................................
...........................................
............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................
........ 22-1
22.1 Using a Recorder.............................................................................................................................................................................................22-1
Recorder............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-1
22.2 Recording Types..............................................................................................................................................................................................22-1
Types.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-1
22.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings...........................................................................................................................................................22-1
Recordings........................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22.4 Setting the Recorder ..........................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 22-2
22.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu........................................................................................................................................... 22-2
22.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording.........................................................................................................................................22-2
Recording......................................................................................................................................... 22-2
22.4.3 Setting the Realtime Reco
Recording
rding Le
Length
ngth ......................................................
............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................
.....22-2
22-2
22.4.4 Changing
Changing the Recording Speed ...........................................................
................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................
................22-3
22-3
22.4.5 Switching Gridlines On or Off.....................................................................................................................................................22-3
Off..................................................................................................................................................... 22-3
22.5 Loading Paper..................................................................................................................................................................................................22-3
Paper.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22-3

6
22.6 Removing Paper Jam.....................................................................................................................................................................................22-4
Jam.....................................................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.7 Cleaning the Recorder Print head.............................................................................................................................................................22-4
head.............................................................................................................................................................22-4

23 Network Connection ......................

............................................
...........................................
...........................................
..............................................
..............................................
................................
.......... 23-1
23.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23-1
23.2 Connecting CMS..............................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
CMS..............................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.3 General Settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................23-2
Settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................23-2
23.3.1 Setting Local IP.................................................................................................................................................................................
IP.................................................................................................................................................................................23-2
23-2
23.3.2 Storing Preset Sites.........................................................................................................................................................................23-2
Sites.........................................................................................................................................................................23-2

24 Configuration Management
Management.....................
...........................................
............................................
...........................................
.............................................
.............................................
..................... 24-1
24.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................24-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................24-1
24.2 Passwo
Password
rd ......................................................
.....................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................
.........................24-1
24-1
24.3 Accessing
Accessing Co
Configuration
nfiguration Management......
Management.....................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
.............................................................................
..............24-1
24-1
24.3.1 General Setup Menu .........................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
.............................................24-2
24-2
24.3.2 Manual Defib Setup Menu...........................................................................................................................................................24-3
Menu...........................................................................................................................................................24-3
24.3.3 AED Setup Menu ...........................................................
................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
.............................................24-3
24-3
24.3.4 Pacer Setup Menu...........................................................................................................................................................................24-4
Menu...........................................................................................................................................................................24-4
24.3.5 ECG Setup Menu..............................................................................................................................................................................24-4
Menu..............................................................................................................................................................................24-4
24.3.6 12-Lead Setup Menu......................................................................................................................................................................24-6
Menu......................................................................................................................................................................24-6
24.3.7 12-Lead Transmission Setup........................................................................................................................................................24-6
Setup........................................................................................................................................................24-6
24.3.8 Resp Setup Menu ...............................................................
................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
............................................24-6
24-6
24.3.9 SpO2 Setup Menu............................................................................................................................................................................24-7
Menu............................................................................................................................................................................24-7
24.3.10 PR Setup Menu .............................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................
.............................................24-7
24-7
24.3.11 NIBP Setup Menu..........................................................................................................................................................................24-7
Menu..........................................................................................................................................................................24-7
24.3.12 CO2 Setup Menu............................................................................................................................................................................24-8
Menu............................................................................................................................................................................24-8
24.3.13 IBP Setup Menu ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................
.............................................24-9
24-9
24.3.14 Te
Temp
mp Setup Menu ............................................................
...........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
.......................................... 24-12
24.3.15 Waveform Setup Menu............................................................................................................................................................ 24-13
24.3.16 Alarm Setup Menu..................................................................................................................................................................... 24-13
24.3.17 Mark Event Setup Menu.......................................................................................................................................................... 24-14
24.3.18 Record Setup Menu ......................................................
........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................
.......................................... 24-14
24.3.19 Data Management Setup Menu........................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.3.20 User Test Setup Menu............................................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.3.21 Network Setup............................................................................................................................................................................ 24-15
24.3.22 Others Menu................................................................................................................................................................................ 24-15

25 Batteries ....................
...........................................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
............................................
................................
.......... 25-1
25.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................25-1
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................................25-1
25.2 Installing the Batteries ...................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................
...........................................25-2
25-2
25.3 Battery Alarms..................................................................................................................................................................................................25-2
Alarms..................................................................................................................................................................................................25-2
25.3.1 No Battery Alarm .............................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
.............................................25-2
25-2
25.3.2 Low Battery Alarm...........................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm...........................................................................................................................................................................25-2
25-2
25.3.3 Battery Aged Alarm ..........................................................
...........................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................
.............................................25-3
25-3
25.3.4 Battery Error Alarm ..........................................................
............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................
.............................................25-3
25-3
25.4 Checking the Batteries..................................................................................................................................................................................25-3
Batteries..................................................................................................................................................................................25-3

7
25.5 Charging batteries.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25-4
25.6 Storing Batteries..............................................................................................................................................................................................25-4
Batteries.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 25-4
25.7 Recycling the Batteries....
Batteries........................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
................................... 25-4

26 Care and Cleaning ..........................................

.................................................................
.............................................
............................................
.............................................
......................................
............... 26-1
26.1 General Points..................................................................................................................................................................................................
Points..................................................................................................................................................................................................26-1
26-1
26.2 Cleaning.............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cleaning.............................................................................................................................................................................................................26-2
26-2
26.3 Disinfecting.......................................................................................................................................................................................................26-2
Disinfecting....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26-2

27 Maintenance and Testing........................................

esting..............................................................
...........................................
............................................
.............................................
..............................
........ 27-1
27.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................27-1
Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 27-1
27.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule.........................................................................................................................................................27-2
Schedule......................................................................................................................................................... 27-2
27.3 Carrying Out Maintenance and Testing.........................................................................
Testing............................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................
......27-2
27-2
27.3.1 Power-on Tests.................................................................................................................................................................................27-2
Tests................................................................................................................................................................................. 27-2
27.3.2 Shift Check.........................................................................................................................................................................................27-3
Check......................................................................................................................................................................................... 27-3
27.3.3 Automated Tests..............................................................................................................................................................................
Tests..............................................................................................................................................................................27-3
27-3
27.3.4 User Test
Test ......................................................
........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
......27-4
27-4
27.3.5 Recorder Inspection.......................................................................................................................................................................
Inspection.......................................................................................................................................................................27-7
27-7
27.3.6 ECG Cable Test.................................................................................................................................................................................. 27-7
27.3.7 Manual Defibrillation Test............................................................................................................................................................27-8
Test............................................................................................................................................................ 27-8
27.3.8 Pacing Test.........................................................................................................................................................................................27-9
Test......................................................................................................................................................................................... 27-9
27.3.9 Peforming Testing
Testing in Installation Mode.........................................................................
Mode.............. ....................................................................................................................
......................................................... 27-9
27.3.10 NIBP Overpressure Protection Test..................................................................
Test...................................................................................................................................
....................................................................
... 27-14
27.3.11 Electrical
Electrical S
Safety
afety Tests
Tests ...........................................................
.............................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
.................................. 27-14

28 Accessori
Accessories
es ......................
...........................................
...........................................
............................................
...........................................
..............................................
...............................................
..........................
.... 28-1
28.1 ECG Accessorie
Accessoriess .........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... .............................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
.......28-1
28-1
28.2 SpO2 Accessories.............................................................................................................................................................................................28-3
Accessories............................................................................................................................................................................................. 28-3
28.3 NIBP Accessorie
Accessoriess .....................................................
........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
.......28-4
28-4
28.4 Temp Accessories............................................................................................................................................................................................ 28-5
28.5 IBP/ICP Accessories...............................................................................
Accessories................ ..................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................
...................................... 28-6
28.6 CO2 Accessorie
Accessoriess ........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................
......28-6
28-6
28.7 Therapy Accessories.......................................................................................................................................................................................28-7
Accessories....................................................................................................................................................................................... 28-7
28.8 Miscellaneous ...........................................................
..............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... 28-8

A Specifications ......................
............................................
.............................................
.............................................
............................................
............................................
.............................................
.........................
.. A-1
A.1 General Specifications ................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................
................................................ A-1
A.2 Defibrillator Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................................. A-2
A.3 Pacer Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................................................A-5
Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................................... A-5
A.4 Monitor Specifications......................................................................................................................................................................................A-5
Specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................... A-5
A.5 Power
Power Supply Specifications ........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... .............................................................................................................
............................................... A-12
A.6 Recorder Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................. A-12
A.7 Alarm Specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................... A-13
A.8 Data
Data Management Specifications ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................ .............................................................................................
....................... A-13
A.9 Wireless Network ..............................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
........................................................ A-13
A.10 Environmental Specifications................................................................................................................................................................... A-14

8
B EMC....................................
EMC..........................................................
............................................
.............................................
..............................................
.............................................
............................................
...........................
..... B-1

C BeneHeart Defibrillator Shift Checklist ....................

..........................................
............................................
...........................................
.............................................
................................
........ C-1

D Alarm Messages ..........................................

................................................................
...........................................
...........................................
..............................................
..............................................
........................ D-1
D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages...................................................................................................................................................................... D-1
D.2 Technical Alarm Messages.............................................................................................................................................................................. D-2

E Electrical Safety Inspection ...................

.........................................
............................................
...........................................
..............................................
...............................................
............................
......E-1
E-1
E.1 Powe
Powerr Cord Plug ...............................................................................................................................
........................................................... .......................................................................................................................................
................................................................... E-1
E.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories................................................................................................................................................................. E-2
E.3 Device Labelling................................................................................................................................................................................................... E-2
E.4 Protective Earth Resistance.............................................................................................................................................................................. E-2
E.5 Earth L
Leakage
eakage Test
Test .................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................
........................................................ E-3
E.6 Patient Leakage Current.................................................................................................................................................................................... E-3
E.7 Mains on Applied Part Leakage...................................................................................................................................................................... E-4
E.8 Patient Auxiliary Current................................................................................................................................................................................... E-4

F Symbols and Abbreviatio

Abbreviations......................................
ns............................................................
............................................
.............................................
..............................................
................................
.........F-1
F-1
F.1 Units.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... F-1
F.2 Symbols ..............................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
................ F-2
F.3 Abbrevia
Abbreviations
tions and Ac
Acronyms......
ronyms.....................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................
..................................... F-2

G Device Trac
Tracking
king ......................
...........................................
...........................................
............................................
...........................................
.............................................
..............................................
........................ G-1

9
FOR YOUR NOTES

10
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Information

DANGER
 Indicates an imminent hazard that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
 Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
 Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in minor personal injury or
product/property damage.

NOTE

 Provides application tips or other useful information to ensure that you get the most from your product.

1-1
1.1.1 Dangers

DANGER
 The equipment delivers up to 360 J of electrical energy. Unless properly used as described in these
Operating Instructions, this electrical energy may cause serious injury or death. Do not attempt to operate

this defibrillator unless thoroughly familiar with these operating instructions and the function of all
controls, indicators, connectors, and accessories.

 Defibrillation current can cause operator or bystander severe injury or even death. Keep distance with the
patient or metal devices connected to the patient during defibrillation.

 Do not disassemble the defibrillator. It contains no operator serviceable components and dangerous high
voltages may be present. Contact authorized service personnel for repair.

 To avoid explosion hazard, do not use the equipment in the presence of oxygen-rich atmospheres,
flammable anesthetics, or other flammable agents (such as gasoline). Keep the equipment and the
operating environment dry and clean.

1.1.2 Warnings

WARNING

 Before putting the system into operation, the operator must verify that the equipment, connecting cables
and accessories are in correct working order and operating condition.

 Make sure the synchronous input system is applied to this equipment and the input signal is correct if
necessary.

 The equipment must be connected to a properly installed power outlet with protective earth contacts
only. If the installation does not provide for a protective earth conductor, disconnect it from the power line
and operate it on smart lithium-ion batteries.

 This equipment is used for single patient at a time.

 Medical electrical equipment which does not incorporate defibrillator protection should be disconnected
during defibrillation.

 Do not defibrillate a patient who lies on the wet ground.

 Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume
to a low level or off may result in a hazard to the patient. Remember that alarm settings should be
customized according to different patient situations and always keeping the patient under close
surveillance is the most reliable way for
f or safe patient monitoring.

 Do not perform any functional check if the equipment is connected with a patient; otherwise the patient
might be shocked.

 Remain attentive to the patient during applying therapy. Delay in delivering a shock may result in a
rhythm that was analyzed as shockable converting spontaneously to non-shockable and could result in
inappropriate delivery of a shock.

1-2
  For the treatment of patients with implantable pacemakers, place therapy pads or paddles away from
internal pacemaker generator if possible to help prevent damage to the pacemaker.

 To avoid inadvertent disconnection, route all cables in a way to prevent a stumbling hazard. Wrap and
secure excess cabling to reduce risk of entanglement
ent anglement or strangulation by patients or personnel.

 Do not touch device connectors, recorder print head, battery connector or other live equipment if in
contact with the patient; otherwise patient injury may result.

 To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories specified in this manual.

 Package material may contaminate the environment. Properly dispose of the package material according
to applicable waste control regulations and keep it out of children’s reach.

1.1.3 Cautions

CAUTION
 Use of Manual Therapy security password requires the clinician to know and remember the password.
Failure to enter correct password will prevent the delivery of manual defibrillation, synchronized
cardioversion and pacing therapy.

 At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as

a s its accessories, must be disposed of in compliance
with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products to avoid contaminating the environment.

 Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper performance of the equipment.
For this reason make sure that all external devices operated in the vicinity of the equipment comply with
the relevant EMC requirements. Mobile phones, X-ray equipment or MRI devices are a possible source of
interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic radiation.

 Before connecting the equipment to the power line, check that the voltage and frequency ratings of the
power line are the same as
a s those indicated on the equipment’s label or in this manual.

 Always install or carry the equipment properly to avoid damage caused by drop, impact, strong vibration
or other mechanical force.

 Dry the equipment immediately in case of rain.

r ain.

1.1.4 Notes

NOTE

 Put the equipment in a location where you can easily see the
t he screen and access the operating controls.

 Keep this manual in the vicinity of the equipment so that it can be obtained conveniently when needed.

 If the equipment is run on a DC power supply, a DC/AC adapter we supply should be used.

 This manual describes all features and options. Your equipment may not have all of them.

1-3
1.2 Equipment Symbols

Caution (Attention, consult

Call for maintenance
accompanying documents)

Alternating current Battery indicator

Audio paused Alarm off

Audio off Alarm paused

Marker Lead select

NIBP start/stop key Event summary

12-Lead ECG Menu

Graphical recorder Electrostatic

Electrost atic sensitive devices

Unlocking Shock button

USB connector Input/Output

Protective earth (ground) Video output

Equipotentiality
Equipotentiality Dangerous voltage

General symbol for

Network connector
recovery/recyclable

1-4
Fragile
Fragile Right side up

Keep dry Maximum stacks

Output; exit Input; entrance

Serial number Date of manufacture

manufact ure

Manufacturer

Authorised representative in the European community

Mark of conformity to European Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC

DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF TYPE CF APPLIED PART

DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF TYPE BF APPLIED PART

Dispose of in accordance to your country’s requirements

1-5
FOR YOUR NOTES

1-6
2 The Basics
2.1 Overview

The BeneHeart (hereinafter

(hereinafter ca
called
lled the equipm
equipment)
ent) is a lightw
lightweight
eight and portable defibrillator/m
defibrillator/monitor
onitor.. It provide
providess four
operating modes: Monitor, Manual Defib, AED and Pacer.

In Monitor Mode, the equipment is intended for monitoring, displaying, reviewing, storing and printing multiple
physiological parameters and waveforms including ECG, pulse oximetry (SpO 2), temperature (Temp), non-invasive
blood pressure (NIBP), invasive blood pressure (IBP) and carbon dioxide (CO 2).

In AED mode, the equipment automatically analyzes the patient’s ECG rhythm and indicates whether or not a
shockable rhythm is detected. V
Voice
oice prompts provide easy-to-follow instructions and patient information to guide
you through the defibrillation process. Messages and flashing buttons are also presented to reinforce the voice
prompts.

In the Manual Defib Mode, the operator analyzes the patient’s ECG, and, if appropriate, follows this procedure:
1 Select the Manual Defib mode, adjust the energy level if necessary;

2 Charge; and

3 Deliver the shock.

Defibrillation may be performed through paddles or multifunction electrode

electrode pads. In Manual Defib Mode, you can
also perform synchronized cardioversion.
cardioversion. If desired, use of Manual Defib Mode may be password protected.
protected.

The Pacer
Pacer Mode offe
offers
rs non-invasive transcutaneou
transcutaneouss pacing therap
therapy.
y. P
Pace
ace pulses are
are delivered
delivered through
through multifunction
electrode pads. Use of Pacer Mode may also be password protected.

The equipment
equipment can be pow
powered
ered by sm
smart
art lithium ion ba
batteries
tteries which ar
are
e recharg
rechargeable
eable and main
maintenance-free.
tenance-free. You can

easily determine the remaining battery charge by viewing the battery power gauge displayed on the screen or by
checking the indicator on the battery itself. An external AC mains or a DC power supply connected throug
through
h a DC/AC
adapter may also be used as a power source and for continuous battery charging.
charging.

The equipment
equipment can be conn
connected
ected to a CMS system th
through
rough a Wi-Fi m
module
odule and a 3G router and
and work as part of the
Pre-Hospital Emergency Information System (hereinafter called PHEIS system). With the PHEIS system, you can pass
the pre-hospital patient information to the in-hospital professional medical personnel for better diagnosis and earlier
preparation for treatments.

The equipment
equipment automatic
automatically
ally stores pat
patient
ient data in an internal stor
storage
age card
card.. Y
You
ou can also expo
export
rt the data through
through the
USB port for viewing and editing on a PC through the data management software.

2-1
2.2 Intended Use
The equipment
equipment is intende
intended
d for exte
external
rnal defibrillation, iinternal
nternal defibrillat
defibrillation,
ion, synchroniz
synchronized
ed cardiov
cardioversion
ersion and
semi-automatic
semi-automatic defibrillation (AED). It can also be used for non-invasive external pacing as well as ECG, SpO2, PR, NIBP,
CO2, IBP and Temp monitoring.

The equipment
equipment is for u
use
se in hospital and pre-hospital settings b
byy qualified m
medical
edical personne
personnell trained in the
the operation
of the equipment and qualified by training in basic life support, advanced cardiac life support or defibrillation.

2.2.1 AED
The AED mode
mode is to be used only on ccardio
ardio arre
arrest
st patients w
who
ho are at le
least
ast 8 years. The patients must be:

 Unresponsive

 Not breathing or not breathing normally

2.2.2 Manual Defibrillation

Asynchronouss defibrillation is the initial treatment for ventricular fibrillation and ventricular tachycardia
Asynchronou tachycardia in patients

that are pulseless and unresponsive

unresponsive.. Synchronous defibrillation is intended for termination of atrial fibrillation.

2.2.3 Noninvasive Pacing

Noninvasive pacing therapy is intended for patients with symptomatic bradycardia. It can also
al so be helpful in patients
with asystole, if performed early.

2.2.4 ECG
The ECG monitoring fu
function
nction is used to monitor and/
and/or
or recor
record
d the patient’s ECG wa
waveform
veform and heart rate.
rate.

2.2.5 Resp
The respiration
respiration monitorin
monitoring
g function is used to continu
continuously
ously monitor the patient’s respiratio
respiration
n rate and respiration
respiration
waveform.

2.2.6 SpO2
The SpO2 function is intended to measu
measure
re patien
patient’s
t’s o
oxygen
xygen sa
saturation
turation in arterial bl ood.

2.2.7 NIBP
The NIBP function
function is intended for non-inv
non-invasive
asive measur
measurement
ement of a p
patient’
atient’ss arterial blood pr
pressure.
essure.

2-2
 2.2.8 Temp
The Temperat
Temperature
ure function is ind
indicated
icated for monitoring a pa
patient’
tient’ss tempera
temperature.
ture.

2.2.9 IBP
The IBP function is intended ffor
or measuring a patient’
patient’ss arterial, venous
venous,, intracranial and other physio
physiological
logical pressu
pressures.
res.

2.2.10 CO2
The CO2 function is intended for monitoring a patient’s exhaled carbon dioxide and to provide a respiration rate.

2.3 Main Unit

2.3.1 Front View

External paddle
Handle

Area 3
Area 1

Recorder

Area 2

2-3
Area 1

3
4

6
1. Alarm lamp

The Alarm lamp

lamp flashes in differe
different
nt color and fr
frequency
equency to match the alar
alarm
m level.

2. Display screen

3. AC power indicator

 Illuminated: when AC mains is connected.

 Off: when AC mains is not connected.

4. Battery indicator

 Yellow: when the battery is being charged.

 Green: when the battery is fully charged or the equipment is run on battery.

 Off: when no battery is installed or battery fails.

5. Service indicator

 Flashing: when a failure is detected, or when battery is not installed but AC mains is connected if
[No Battery]
Battery] is configured as [Service
[Service Indicator ON],
ON], or in case of low battery when AC mains is not
connected.

 Off: when the equipment operates properly.

6. Soft keys

They are corresponding

corresponding w
with
ith the soft key labels located im
immediately
mediately abo
above.
ve. The labels of the soft keys changes
changes
according to the current operating mode.

2-4
Area 2

1 6

4
8

5 9

1. Alarm Pause button

Press this button to pause, reactivate or switch off the alarms.

2. Lead Select button

Press this button to select the lead for the first ECG waveform.

3. 12-Lead ECG button

button (for
(for equipments
equipments configured with 12-lead ECG analysis fu
function)
nction)

Press this button to enter 12-Lead ECG screen.

Or Event Summary button (for equipments configured without 12-lead ECG analysis function)

Press this button to record the event summary report.

4. NIBP button

Press this button to start or stop NIBP measurements.

5. Speaker

It gives alarm sounds and voice prompts.

6. Main Menu button

If no menu is displayed on the screen, pressing it will enter the main menu. If there is a menu displayed, pressing
it will close that menu.

7. Navigation knob

You can:

 Rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise

counterclockwise to move the cursor, or

 Press it to confirm the selection.

8. Mark Event button

Press it to manually mark specified events. If a menu has been open, pressing this button will close the menu.

9. Microphone

It is used for voice

v oice recording in AED mode.

2-5
Area 3

1. Mode Select knob

Rotate this knob to select the operating mode or turn the equipment off.

2. Energy Select button

In Manual Defib mode, press this button to select energy level.

3. Charge button

Press this button to charge the defibrillator.

4. Shock button

Press this button to deliver a shock to the patient.

2-6
Recorder

1 2

3 5

1. Start/Stop key

Press this key to start a recording or stop the current recording.

2. Indicator

 Illuminated: when the recorder works correctly.

 Flashes: when an error occurred to the recorder, or the recorder runs out of paper.

3. Paper outlet

4. Recorder door

5. Latch

2-7
2.3.2 Side View

Therapy port

Therapy port is used to conn

connect
ect paddles cable o
orr pads cable.

2-8
 5
1 6

2 7

8
3

1. IBP1: IBP sensor connector (channel 1)

2. IBP2: IBP sensor connector (channel 2)

3. NIBP: NIBP cuff connector

4. Gas outlet

5. T1: Temp probe connector (channel 1)

6. ECG: ECG cable connector

7. SpO2: SpO2 sensor connector

8. T2: Temp probe connector (channel 2)

9. CO2: sampling line connector (for microstream CO2 module) or watertrap connector (for sidestream CO2 module)

2-9
2.3.3 Rear View

6
7
2

9
3

4 5
1. Hook

2. Battery 2

3. Battery 1

4. External power input

It connects an AC power cord or a DC/AC adapter to run the equipment respectively on the external AC mains or
DC power supply.

5. Equipotential grounding terminal

When the defibrillator/monitor and other devices are to be used together, their equipotential grounding
terminals should be connected together to eliminate the potential difference between them.

6. USB connector

7. Network connector

It is a standard RJ45 connector.

8. Multifunctional connector

It provides ECG output and defib synchronization input.

9. VGA connector

2-10
2.3.4 External Paddles

1 2 5

3
4

Sternum paddle Apex paddle

1. Shock button

2. Energy Select button

3. Shock indicator

4. Charge button

5. Shock button

2-11
2.4 Display Views
A typical screen in Manual Defib Mode is shown below.

1 2 3 4 5

6 7

10 11 12

1. Patient Information area

This area shows patient

patient name, patie
patient
nt categor
category,
y, paced status, and current date and time.

 : indicates that the patient has an implanted pacemaker.

2. Alarm status symbols

indicates alarms are paused;

indicates all alarms are turned off;

indicates alarm sounds are paused;

indicates alarm sounds are turned off;

2-12
3 Physiological Alarm area

This area shows physiological

physiological alarm messages. When multiple alarms occur, they will be displayed circularly.

4 Technical Alarm area

This area shows technical

technical alarm m
messages
essages and pro
prompt
mpt message
messages.
s. When multiple messages come,
come, they will
will be
displayed circularly.

5. Battery Status indicator

It indicates battery status. Refer to chapter 25 Batteries for details.

6. Waveform area

This area shows measuremen

measurementt waveforms
waveforms.. The waveform label is displayed at the upper left
left corner of the
waveform.

7. Parameter area

This area shows measuremen

measurementt parameter
parameters.
s. Each measur
measurement
ement mod
module
ule has a parame
parameter
ter block and tthe
he parameter
parameter
name is displayed at the upper left corner.

8. Manual Defib information area

This area shows the

the selected defibrillation en
energy,
ergy, shock co
counter
unter as well as prompt relate
related
d to manual
defibrillation.

9. Auxiliary Parameter area

This area shows parameters

parameters tthat
hat cannot be di
displayed
splayed in the p
parameter
arameter ar
area.
ea. When this are
area
a cannot
accommodate
accommodate all parameters, the excess parameters will automatically occupy the area of last waveform.

10. Runtime area

This area shows the

the equipmen
equipment's
t's operating time since it is turned on.

11. Prompt area

This area shows the

the prompt inf
information.
ormation.

12. Soft Key area

The three soft

soft key labels co
correspond
rrespond to the soft key bu
buttons
ttons located immediately below. The labels of the soft
keys changes according to the current display view and function. Soft key labels appearing as blank indicate that
the soft key is inactive.

2-13
FOR YOUR NOTES

2-14
3 Basic Operations and Settings
3.1 Installation

WARNING
 The equipment shall be installed by personnel authorized by the manufacturer.

 The software copyright of the equipment is solely owned by the the manufacturer. No organization or
individual shall resort to juggling, copying, or exchanging it or to any other infringement on it in any form
or by any means without due permission.

 Devices connected to the equipment must meet the requirements

re quirements of the applicable IEC standards (e.g. IEC
60950 safety standards for information technology equipment and IEC 60601-1 safety standards for
medical electrical equipment). The system configuration must meet the requirements of the IEC 60601-1-1
medical electrical systems standard. Any personnel who connect devices to the equipment’s signal

input/output port is responsible for providing evidence that the safety certification of the devices has
been performed in accordance to the IEC 60601-1-1. If you have any question, please contact the the
manufacturer.

 If it is not evident from the equipment specifications whether a particular combination is hazardous, for
example, due to summation of leakage currents, consult the manufacturers or else an expert in the field, to
ensure the necessary safety of all devices concerned will not be impaired by the proposed combination.

3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking

Before unpacking, examine the packing case carefully for signs of damage. If any damage is detected, contact the carrier
or the manufacturer.
manufacturer. If the packing case is intact, open the package and remove the equipment and accessories
accessories carefully.
Check all materials against the packing list and check for any mechanical damage. If you have any question, please
contact us.

WARNING
 Package material may contaminate the environment. Properly dispose of the package material according
to applicable waste control regulations and keep it out of children’s reach.

 The equipment might be contaminated during storage and transport. Before use, please verify whether
the packages are intact, especially the packages of single use accessories. In case of any damage, do not
apply it to patients.

NOTE
 Save the packing case and packaging material as they can be used if the equipment must be reshipped.

3-1
3.1.2 Environmental Requirements
The operating
operating environ
environment
ment of the equipment m
must
ust meet the requ
requirements
irements sp
specified
ecified in this manual.
manual.

The environment
environment where
where the e
equipment
quipment is use
used
d shall be re
reasonably
asonably free from noises
noises,, vibration, dust, corrosive,
corrosive,
flammable and explosive substances. If the equipment is installed in a cabinet, sufficient space in front and behind shall
be left for convenient operation, maintenance and repair. Moreover, to maintain good ventilation, the equipment shall
be at least 2 inches (5 cm) away from around the cabinet.

When the equipment is moved from one place to another, condensation may occur as a result of temperature or
humidity difference.
difference. In this case, never start the system before the condensation disappears.

NOTE
 Make sure that the operating environment of the equipment meets the specific requirements. Otherwise
unexpected consequences, e.g. damage to the equipment, could result.

3.2 Basic Operation

3.2.1 Turning Power On
Once the equipment is installed, you can get ready for monitoring and therapy:
1. Before tu
turning
rning on tthe
he equipm
equipment,
ent, check for any mechanical d
damage
amage and make sure that all external
external cables,
plug-ins and accessories are properly connected.

2. Plug the pow

power
er cord int
into
o the AC pow
power
er source. IIff you run th
the
e equipment on battery power, ensure that the battery
battery
is sufficiently charged. If you run the equipment on DC power supply, a DC/AC adapter we supply should be used.

3. Turn the Mode Sele

Select
ct knob to enter the desired w
working
orking mo
mode.
de. After the start-up screen is displayed, the system
gives a beep, and meanwhile, the alarm lamp is illuminated in yellow, and then turns red, and then turns off.

4. The equipment enters the screen of selected mode.

WARNING
 Do not use the equipment for any monitoring or therapy procedure on a patient
p atient if you suspect it is not
working properly, or if it is mechanically damaged. Contact your service personnel or us.

3.2.2 Starting Monitoring or Therapy

1. Decide which measureme
measurements
nts or therapy you want to make.

2. Check that the patient cables and sensors are correct.

3. Connect the required patient cables and sensors.

4. Enter tthe
he appropr
appropriate
iate ope
operating
rating m
mode
ode and check tthat
hat the settings ar
are
e prope
properr for your patient.
patient.

Refer to the appropriate sections for details of how to perform patient monitoring and therapy.

3-2
3.2.3 Disconnecting from Power
To disconnect the e
equipment
quipment fr
from
om the AC power sou
source,
rce, fo
follow
llow this proc
procedure:
edure:

1. Confirm that the patient monitoring or therapy is completed.

completed.

2. Disconnect the patient cables and sensors from the patient.

3. Make sure to save or clear the patient data as re

required.
quired.

4. Turn the Mode S

Select
elect Knob to Off. After 10 seconds, tthe
he equip
equipment
ment is shut down
down..

3.2.4 Auto Restoring to Last Configuration

During operation, you may make changes to some settings. However, these changes may not be saved as user
configuration.
configuration. To preven
preventt the changes from losing in case of sudden power failure, the equipment saves the settings in
real time. The saved settings are the latest configuratio
configuration.
n. In case of power failure, the equipment loads the latest
configuration
configuration if restarts within 60 seconds; it load the user configuratio
configuration
n if restarts 120 seconds later after the power
failure; it may load either the latest configuration or the user configuration if restarts between 60 and 120 seconds after
the power failure.

3.3 Using the Main Menu

To enter the main menu, pr
press
ess the Main Menu b
button
utton on the equip
equipment’
ment’ss front.

Other menus are similar to the main menu and contain the following parts:

1. Heading

2. Main body:
body: displays options, but
buttons,
tons, prom
prompt
pt messag
messages,
es, etc. Pressing the menu
menu button with “>>’’ enters a
submenu to reveal more options or information.

3. Exit button

3.4 Changing General Settings

3.4.1 Setting the Date and Time
1. Press the Main Menu bu
button
tton o
on
n the front pane
panel,l, and then sele
select
ct [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [[Configuration >>]
Configuration >>] enter the
→

required password.

2. Select [General Setup >>].

>>].

3. Select [Date Format]

Format] from [yyyy-mm-dd], [[mm-dd-yyyy
[yyyy-mm-dd], mm-dd-yyyy]] and [dd-mm-yyyy
[dd-mm-yyyy].
].

4. Select [Time Format]

Format] and toggle between [24h
[24h]] and [12h
[12h].
].

5. Set [System Time].

Time].

3-3
 You can also set system time by selecting [Configuration
[Configuration >>]
>>] → [View Config]
Config] → [General Setup >>].
>>]. However, you
cannot select date format and time format in this case. After the completion of setting system time, exit the
configuration
configuration mode, and then the system will restart.

3.4.2 Adjusting the Screen Brightness

1. Press the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>].
Others >>].

2. Set [Brightness
Brightness]] to an appropriate level: 10 is the brightest, and 1 is the least bright.
You can also change screen brightness by entering configuration mode and selecting [[Others
Others]] from the Configuration
Main menu.

3.4.3 Changing Key Volume

1. Press the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>].
Others >>].

2. Select [Key Volume]

Volume] and then select an appropriate value. 0 means key volume off and 10 is the maximum volume.

You can also change key volume by entering configuration mode and selecting [Others
[Others]] from the Configuration Main
menu.

3.4.4 Selecting High Contrast Mode

The equipment
equipment has the fun
function
ction of high co
contrast
ntrast display so that the user can view the display under high ambient
illumination.

To enable the High Contrast displa

display,
y,

 In the Monitor, Manual Defib and Pacer mode, press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select
[High Contrast].
Contrast]. To disable high contrast display, select [Full
[Full Color]
Color] in the Main Menu.

 In AED mode, press the [High

[High Contrast]
Contrast] soft key. To disable high contrast display, press the [Full
[Full Color]
Color] soft key.

Once High Contrast is selected, the system remains in high contract mode when you change the operating mode.
However, the setting will not be saved if the equipment is turned off.

3.4.5 Adjusting Waveform Position

1. Press the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Waves >>].
Waves >>].

2. In the [Waves
Waves]] menu, set [Wave
[Wave 2],
2], [[Wave 3] and [Wave
Wave 3] [Wave 4].
4]. Wave 1 is always ECG1, which is unchangeable.

You can also change waveform position by entering configuration mode and selecting [Waveform
[ Waveform Setup]
Setup] from the
Configuration
Configuration Main menu.

3.5 Analog Output

The equipment
equipment is configu
configured
red with a multifunction co
connector
nnector for E
ECG
CG analog o
output.
utput.

3-4
4 Managing Patients
4.1 Overview
Patient information
information management function enables you to edit and manage information of the current patient.

4.2 Editing Patient Information

You can edit patient information in Monitor, Manual Defib and Pacer mode.

To edit patient information,

1. Press the Main Menu but

button
ton o
on
n the front pane
panel,l, and then sele
select
ct [[Patient >>] and then make
Patient Demographics >>]
changes as desired.

2. Select [Others >>]

>>] to edit more patient information.

Archive ID is created automatically when the equipment is turned on. It is unchangeable. When the equipment is turned
off, the current patient is discharged and the archive ID turns to be historical archive ID.

For a new patient, if patient category is changed, the system will restore the default alarm settings of this patient
category; if patient category is not changed, the alarm settings remain unchanged. If you restart the equipment after
normal power-off, the default alarm settings will be loaded.

4-1
FOR YOUR NOTES

4-2
5 Alarms
Alarms, triggered
triggered by a vital sign that appears abnormal or by technical problems of the equipment, are indicated
indicated to the
user by visual and audible alarm indications.

WARNING
 A potential hazard exists if different alarm presets are used for the same or similar device in any single
area, e.g. an intensive care unit or cardiac operating room.

5.1 Alarm Categories

By nature, the equipment’s alarms can be classified into three categories: physiological alarms, technical alarms and
prompt messages.

1. Physiological alarms

Physiological alarms, also called patient status alarms, are triggere

triggered
d by a monitored parameter value that violates
set alarm limits or by an abnormal patient condition. Physiological alarm message
messagess are displayed in the

physiological alarm area. In AED mode, no physiological alarm will be presented.

2. Technical alarms

Technical alarms, also called system status alarms, ar

are
e trigger
triggered
ed by a dev
device
ice malfunction or a patient data
data distortion
due to improper operation or system failure. Technical alarm messages are displayed in the technical alarm area.

3. Prompt messages

As a matter of fact, prompt messages are not alarm messages. Apart from the physiological and technical alarms,
the equipment also shows some messages indicating system status. Messages of this kind are usually displayed in
the prompt area. Therapy-related prompts are shown in correspond
corresponding
ing information area. Some special prompts are
shown in dialog boxes.

5.2 Alarm Levels

By severity, alarms can be classified into three categories: high level alarms, medium level alarms and low level alarms.

Physiological alarms Technical alarms

High level Indicate that your patient is in a life
threatening
threatening situation, such as Asystole,
Vfib/Vtac and so forth, and an
emergency treatment is demanded.
Medium Indicate that your patient’s vital signs
level appear abnormal and an immediate
treatment is required.
Low level Indicate that you patient’s vital signs
appear abnormal and an immediate
treatment may be required.
Indicate a severe device malfunction or an improper operation,
which may result that that the equipment cannot detect critical
patient status or may cause therapy failed, and thus threate
threaten
n the
patient’s life, such as low battery.
Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation, which
may not threaten the patient’s life but may compromise patient
monitoring or therapy.
Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation, which
may compromise
compromise a certain function but will not threaten the
patient’s life.

5-1
5.3 Alarm Indicators
When an alarm occurs, the equipment indicates it to the user through visual or audible alarm indications.

 Alarm lamp

 Alarm tones

 Alarm message

 Flashing numeric

NOTE
 When multiple alarms of different levels occur simultaneously, the equipment will select the alarm of the
highest level and give visual and audible alarm indications accordingly. Alarm messages will be displayed
circularly.

 Some physiological alarms, such as Asystole, are exclusive. They have identical alarm tones and alarm
lights with normal high level physiological alarms, but their alarm messages are displayed exclusively.
That is to say, when an exclusive physiological alarm and a normal high level physiological alarms are
triggered simultaneously, only alarm message of the exclusive physiological alarm is displayed.

5.3.1 Alarm Lamps

If an alarm occurs, the alarm lamp will flash. The color and flashing frequency matc
match
h the alarm level as follows:

 High level alarms the lamp quickly flashes red.

 Medium level alarms the lamp slowly flashes yellow.

 Low level alarms the lamp lights yellow without flashing.

5.3.2 Audible Alarms

The equipment
equipment uses diff
different
erent alarm tone patter
patterns
ns to match the alarm leve
level:l:

 High level alarms triple + double + triple + double beeps.

 Medium level alarms triple beeps.

 Low level alarms single beep.

5.3.3 Alarm Message

When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will appear in the technical or physiological alarm area. For physiological
alarms, the asterisk symbols (*) before the alarm message match the alarm level as follows:

 High level alarms ***

 Medium level alarms **

 Low level alarms *

5-2
 Additionally,, the alarm message has different background color which matches the alarm level.
Additionally
For physiological alarms

 High level alarms red

 Medium level alarms yellow

 Low level alarms yellow

For technical alarms

 High level alarms: red

 Medium level alarms: yellow

 Low level alarms: blue

5.3.4 Flashing Numeric

If an alarm triggere
triggered
d by an alarm limit violation occurs, the numeric of the measurement in alarm will flash every second,
and corresponding alarm limit will also flash at the same frequency indicating the alarm limit is violated.

5.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols

Apart from the aforeme
aforementioned
ntioned alarm indicators, the equipment still uses the following symbols telling the alarm status:

 indicates all alarms are paused.

 indicates all system alarms are turned off.

 indicates alarm sounds are paused.

 indicates alarm sounds are turned off.

5.4 Alarm Tone Configuration

5.4.1 Changing the Alarm Volume
1. Press the Main Menu bu
button
tton o
on
n the front pane
panel,l, and then sele
select
ct [[Alarm >>]
Alarm Setup >>] →[Alm Volume >>].
>>].

2. Set [Alm Volume]

Volume] to an appropriate level:

 If [[Audio
Audio Off] is enabled, alarm volume can be set to a value between 0 and 10, in which 0 means audio off
and 10 the maximum volume level.

 If [[Audio
Audio Off] is disabled, alarm volume can be set to a value between 1 and 10, in which 1 is the minimum
volume level and 10 the maximum.

To disable or enable [Audio Off], access configurati

configuration
on management.

The setting of
of alarm volum
volume
e will not be sa
saved
ved when tthe
he system is power off
off..
Yo
You
u can also set alarm volume in configuration mode. In this case, the setting will be saved.

5-3
 NOTE
 You cannot adjust alarm volume when an alarm is switched off.

5.4.2 Setting the Interval between Alarm Sounds

1. Press the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [Configuration >>]
>>] enter the
→

required password.

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>]

>>] to enter the [Alarm
[Alarm Setup]
Setup] menu.

3. Respectively set [High Alarm Interval (s)],

(s)], [[Med (s)] and [Low
Med Alarm Interval (s)] [Low Alarm Interval (s)].
(s)].

WARNING
 Do not rely exclusively on audible alarm system. Setting alarm volume to a low level may result in a hazard
to the patient. Always keep the
th e patient under close surveillance.

5.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu

Press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select [Alarm
[ Alarm Setup >>]
>>] to enter the Alarm Setup menu.

5.5.1
In Setting
the main Alarm
menu, select Properties
[ Alarm
[Alarm >>] for
Setup >>] AllAlarm
[Para.
→
Parameters
>>] to enter the Para. Alarm setup menu, where you can
>>]
review and set alarm limits, alarm switches, alarm level and alarm recordings for all parameters.

 When a parameter alarm is switched on, the equipment gives alarm indications in accordance with the preset

alarm level and stores related waveforms and parameter values.

5-4
  When a parame
parameter
ter ala
alarm
rm is swi
switche
tched
d off, the alarm o
off
ff symb
symbol
ol “ ” is displ
displayed
ayed iin
n the paramet
parameter
er win
window.
dow. F
For
or

NIBP and
and IBP, tthe
he alar
alarm
m off sy
symbol
mbol “ ” is displ
displayed
ayed o
only
nly whe
when
n all the NI
NIBP
BP or IB
IBP
P alarms
alarms are sswitch
witched
ed off

simultaneously.

 If the measurement’s [On/Off

[On/Off] and [Record
[Record]] are set to [On
[On],
], automatic recording of all the measurement numerics
and related waveforms is possible when a measurement alarm occurs.

To reset the default settings

settings,, select the [[Defaults
Defaults]] button.

NOTE
 You cannot simultaneously switch on HR and PR alarms. In the case that PR alarm is on, switching on HR
alarm will automatically turn off PR alarm, and
a nd vice versa.

You can also set parameter alarm properties by selecting a parameter window and select [Para.
[Para. Alarm >>]
>>] in the
pop-up menu.

WARNING

 Make sure that the alarm limits settings are appropriate for your patient before patient monitoring.
 Setting the alarm limit to an extreme value may cause the alarm system to be ineffective. For example,
high oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a consideration,
do NOT set the SpO2 high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the alarm off.

5.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Limits Automatically

The defibrillator/monitor
defibrillator/monitor can automatically adjust the pa
patient’s
tient’s alarm limits acc
according
ording to tthe
he measur
measured
ed vital signs. When
[Auto Limits]
Limits] is selected, the equipment automatically calculates
calculates alarm limits based on the latest measured parameter
values.

To enable auto alarm limits, press the Main Menu butt

button
on on the e
equipment’
quipment’ss front pane
panel,l, and then select
select [[Alarm
Alarm Setup
>>]
>>] [Para. Alarm>>]
→ Alarm>>] → [Auto Limits]
Limits] [Ok].
→

You can also access [Auto

[Auto Limits]
Limits] by select a parameter window to enter the [Para.
[Para. Alarm]
Alarm] menu.

When auto alarm limits have been applied, you can manually adjust the alarm limits through the Para. Alarm Setup
menu so that they are appropriate for your patient.

The defibrillator/monitor
defibrillator/monitor ccalculates
alculates the au
auto
to limits based on the follow
following
ing rules.

Low alarm limit High alarm limit Auto alarm limits

Module Parameter
Adult/pediatric Neonate Adult/pediatric Neonate range
HR×0.8 or 40 bpm (HR-30) or 90 bpm HR×1.25 or 240 Adult/pediatric:: 35 to
Adult/pediatric
(HR + 40) or 200 bpm
ECG HR (whichever is (whichever is bpm whichever is 240
whichever is lower)
greater) greater) lower) Neonate: 55 to 225

5-5
 Low alarm limit High alarm limit Auto alarm limits
Module Parameter
Adult/pediatric Neonate Adult/pediatric Neonate range
RR×0.5 or 6/min (RR-10) or 30/min RR×1.5 or 30/min Adult/pediatric:
(RR+25) or 85/min
Resp RR (whichever is (whichever is (whichever is 6 to 55
(whichever is lower)
greater) greater) lower) Neonate: 10 to 90

Same as the default Same as the Same as the Same as the default Same as the
SpO2
alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit measurement range

SpO2 PR×0.8 or 40 bpm (PR-30) or 90 bpm PR×1.25 or 240 Adult/pediatric: 35 to

(PR + 40) or 200 bpm
PR (whichever is (whichever is bpm whichever is 240
whichever is lower)
greater) greater) lower) Neonate: 55 to 225
(SYS-15) or
(SYS + 15) or Adult: 45 to 270
SYS×0.68 + 45mmHg SYS×0.86 +
NIBP-S 105mmHg Pediatric: 45 to 185
10mmHg (whichever is 38mmHg
(whichever is lower) Neonate: 35 to 115
greater)
(Dia-15) or
(Dia + 15) or Adult: 25 to 225
20mmHg Dia×0.86 +
NIBP NIBP-D Dia×0.68 + 6mmHg 80mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
(whichever is 32mmHg
is lower) Neonate: 20 to 90
greater)
(Mean-15) or
Mean×0.68 + 35mmHg Mean×0.86 + (Mean + 15) or Adult: 30 to 245
NIBP-M 95mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 30 to 180
8mmHg (whichever is 35mmHg
is lower) Neonate: 25 to 105
greater)
T1 (T1 - 0.5)℃ (T1 - 0.5)℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ 1 to 49℃
T2 (T1 - 0.5)℃ (T1 - 0.5)℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ 1 to 49℃
Temp
Same as the default Same as the Same as the Same as the default Same as the
TD
alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit measurement range

(SYS-15) or
(SYS + 15) or Adult: 45 to 270
SYS×0.68 + 45mmHg SYS×0.86 +
IBP: ART/ IBP-S 105mmHg Pediatric: 45 to 185
10mmHg (whichever is 38mmHg
Ao/ (whichever is lower) Neonate: 35 to 115
greater)
UAP/
BAP/ (Dia-15) or (Dia + 15) or Adult: 25 to 225
20mmHg Dia×0.86 +
FAP/ IBP-D Dia×0.68 + 6mmHg 80mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
(whichever is 32mmHg
LV/ is lower) Neonate: 20 to 90
greater)
P1-P2
(Mean-15) or
(Arterial (Mean + 15) or Adult: 30 to 245
Mean×0.68 + 35mmHg Mean×0.86 +
pressure) IBP-M 95mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 30 to 180
8mmHg (whichever is 35mmHg
is lower) Neonate: 25 to 105
greater)
IBP-S SYS×0.75 SYS×0.75 SYS×1.25 SYS×1.25
PA IBP-D Dia×0.75 Dia×0.75 Dia×1.25 Dia×1.25 3 to 120mmHg
IBP-M Mean×0.75 Mean×0.75 Mean×1.25 Mean×
Mean×1.25
1.25

5-6
 Low alarm limit High alarm limit Auto alarm limits
Module Parameter
Adult/pediatric Neonate Adult/pediatric Neonate range
IBP:
CVP/
ICP/
LAP/
RAP/ IBP-M Mean×0.75 Mean×0.75 Mean×1.25 Mean×1.25 3 to 40mmHg

UVP/
P1-P2
(Venous
pressure)
0-32mmHg: 0-32mmHg: 0-32mmHg:
0-32mmHg:
remains remains remains
remains unchanged
unchanged unchanged unchanged

32-35mmHg: 32-35mmHg: 32-35mmHg: 32-35mmHg:

29mmHg 29mmHg 41mmHg 41mmHg

35-45mmHg: 35-45mmHg: 35-45mmHg: 35-45mmHg: Same as the

EtCO2
etCO2-6mmHg etCO2-6mmHg etCO2+6mmHg etCO2+6mmHg measurement range

45-48mmHg: 45-48mmHg: 45-48mmHg: 45-48mmHg:

CO2 39mmHg 39mmHg 51mmHg 51mmHg

>48mmHg: >48mmHg: >48mmHg:

>48mmHg:
remains remains remains
remains unchanged
unchanged unchanged unchanged
Same as the Same as the default Same as the
FiCO2 N/A N/A
default alarm limit alarm limit measurement range
awRR×1.5 or
awRR×0.5 or 6/min awRR-10 or 30/min Adult/pediatric:
30/min awRR+25 or 85/min
awRR (whichever is (whichever is 6 to 55
(whichever is (whichever is lower)
l ower)
greater) greater) Neonate: 10 to 90
lower)

NOTE
 You can enable auto alarm limits only when the current parameter measurement is within the auto alarm
limits range.

5-7
5.6 Pausing Alarms
You can temporarily
temporaril y disable alarm indicators by pressing the hardkey on the equipment’s front. When alarms are
paused:

 For physiological alarms, no alarm indication is shown. New physiological alarm will not be presented.

 The remaining alarm pause tim

time
e is displayed in the physiologic
physiological
al alarm area.

 For technical alarms, alarm sounds are paused, but alarm lamps and alarm messages remain presented.

 is displayed in the sound symbol area. If a new technical alarm is triggered in the alarm paused period, the

alarm message will be displayed.

When the alarm pause time expires, the alarm paused status is automatically deactivated. You
You can also cancel the alarm

paused status by pressing the hardkey.

The default alarm

alarm pause time is 2 minutes. To change alarm pause time,

1. Press the Main Menu but

button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [Configuration >>]
>>] enter the
→

required password.
2. Select [Alarm Setup >>]
>>] → [Alarm Pause Time]
Time] and then select an appropriate value.

5.7 Switching Alarms Off

When an alarm is switched off, the alarm status is the same with that when an alarm is paused.

Alarms are switched off when:

 The hardkey is pressed

pressed if the [[Alarm Time] is set to [Permanent
Alarm Pause Time] [ Permanent].
].


The equipment
equipment is switched to the Manual DeDefib
fib mode. Or
 The equipment
equipment exit synchr
synchronous
onous defibrillatio
defibrillation
n when operat
operating
ing in the Manual De
Defib
fib mode.

The alarm off status is exite

exited
d when,

 The hardkey is pressed,

pressed, or

 Sync Defib is switched on in Manual Defib mode.

5-8
5.8 Pausing Alarm Sounds

You can press the [Audio

[Audio Pause]
Pause] softkey to pause alarm tones. In this case, the symbol will be displayed in the

sound symbol area indicating all system sounds are silenced temporarily. In the audio paused status, all alarm indicators
except audible alarm tones works properly.
properly. If alarms are switched off or paused, the [ Audio Pause]
Pause] soft key is not

shown.

The audio paused

paused status is exit
exited
ed when,

 The [ Audio On]

On] soft key is pressed.

 Other alarms occur. Or

The hardkey is pr
pressed
essed to perm
permanently
anently or ttemporarily
emporarily sw
switch
itch off the alarm
alarms.
s.

5.9 Switching Off Alarm Sounds

In the event that [Audio
[Audio Off] is enabled, to switch off the alarm tone, set [[Alm Volume] to 0 while operating in Monitor
Alm Volume]

mode, Manual Defib mode or Pacer mode. In the audio off status, appears in the sound symbol area. In this case,

the alarm status is the same with that when alarm tones are paused.

The audio off status

status is exited when:

 The hardkey is pressed. In this case, the equipment enters the alarm paused status and the alarm volume is

reset to the default level. The symbol is displayed in the sound symbol area.

 The [Audio
[Audio Pause]
Pause] soft key is pressed. In this case, the equipment enters the audio paused status and the alarm

volume is reset to the default level. The symbol is displayed in the sound symbol area.

 Operating mode is switched. Then the equipment enters the default alarm status of corresponding operating
mode. Or

 Alarm volume is changed to a value between 1 and 10.

5.10 Reminder Tones

When alarms or alarm sounds are turned off, the equipmen
equipmentt can give a reminder tone of a single beep every 60 seconds.

The reminder
reminder tone is sw
switched
itched off by default. Yo
You
u can switch it on by selecting [Alarm Setup]
Setup] →[Reminder Tone]
Tone]
through the Configuration Management Main menu. You can also change reminder volume. The default reminder
volume is [Med
[Med].
].

5-9
5.11 Latching Alarms
The latching setting for physiological alarms defines ho
how
w alarm indicat
indicators
ors behave w
when
hen you do not acknowledge
acknowledge them.

 If an alarm is latched, alarm indications remain presented even though alarm conditions end, except that:

 The parameter
parameter reading and violated alarm limit stop flashing.

 The time when

when the alarm is last triggered is displayed behind the alarm me
message.
ssage.

 If an alarm is not latched, the alarm indications disappear as soon as the alarm conditions end.

To latch a phy
physiological
siological alarm,

1. Press the Main Menu but

button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [Configuration >>]
>>]→ enter the
required password.

2. Select [Alarm Setup]

Setup] and set [Latching
[ Latching Alarms]
Alarms] to [Yes
[Yes].
].

Only physiological alarms can be latched.

You can clear the latched alarms by pressing the hardkey.

5.12 Clearing Technical Alarms

For some technical alarms, their alarm lamp flashing and alarm tones are cleared and the alarm messages change to

prompt messages after the hardkey or [Audio Pause]

Pause] soft key is pressed. After the equipmen
equipmentt restores the normal

alarm status, it can give alarm indications correctly in case these alarms are triggered again.

For some technical alarms, all their alarm indications are cleared after the hardkey or [Audio Pause]
Pause] soft key is

pressed.. After the equipment restores

pressed restores the normal alarm status, it can give alarm indications correctly in case these
alarms are triggere
triggered
d again.

For others, their alarm tones are cleared but the alarm lamp flashing and alarm messages remain after the hardkey

or [Audio
[Audio Pause]
Pause] soft key is pressed. After the equipmen
equipmentt restores the normal alarm status, all the alarm indications will
continue if the alarm conditions still present.

5.13 When an Alarm Occurs

When an alarm occurs, observe the following steps and take proper actions:

1. Check the patient’s condition.

2. Confirm the alarming parameter or alarm category.

3. Identify the alarm source.

4. Take proper action to eliminate the alarm condition.

5. Make sure the alarm condition is corrected.

For actions taken with regard to specific alarms, see Appendix D Alarm Messages.
Messages.

5-10
6 Monitoring ECG
6.1 Overview
The electrocardiogram
electrocardiogram (ECG) m
measures
easures the electrical activity of the heart and displa
displays
ys it as wav
waveforms
eforms and numerics.
numerics. The
equipment enables ECG monitoring through
through 3-, 5-, 12- lead ECG sets, external paddles and multifunction electrode pads.
If both ECG sets and paddles/pads are connected, the configured ECG waveforms are displayed in the waveform area.

6.2 Safety

WARNING
 Periodically inspect the electrode application site to ensure skin quality. If the skin quality changes,
replace the electrodes or change the application site.

 Use defibrillation-proof ECG cables during defibrillation.

 When monitoring a patient implanted with a pacemaker, be sure to select correct paced status. Otherwise,
the pacing pulses may be counted in the case of cardiac arrest or some arrhythmias. Do not completely rely
on the heart rate reading or the heart rate alarms. Always keep paced patients under close surveillance.

NOTE
 When connecting electrodes and/or patient cables, make sure that the connectors never come into contact
with other conductive parts, or with earth. Particularly make sure that all of the ECG electrodes are
attached to the patient.

 Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and electrosurgery interference may cause
problems with the waveform.

 If selected lead cannot provide valid ECG signals, a dash line is shown in the ECG waveform area.

 Avoid using external paddles for ECG monitoring if possible.

 Use the same type of ECG electrodes when monitoring ECG through ECG lead set.

6-1
6.3 Monitoring View

You can access Monitor mode by switching the Mode Select k nob to the Monitor position. When operating in Monitor
mode, the equipment displays up to two ECG waveforms, the heart rate reading, other available parameter values and
active alarm settings.

6.4 Preparing to Monitor ECG

6.4.1 ECG Monitoring with Electrodes
1. Prepare the patient’s skin. Proper skin preparatio
preparation
n is necess
necessary
ary for good signal quality at tthe
he electr
electrode,
ode, as th
the
e skin is
a poor conductor of electricity. To properly prepare the skin, choose flat areas and then follow this procedure:

 Shave hair from skin at chosen sites.

 Gently rub skin surface at application sites to remove dead skin cells.

 Thoroughly clean
clean the sites w
with
ith mild soap and w
water.
ater. We do not recommend
recommend using ether
ether or pure alcohol,
because this dries the skin and increases the resistance.

 Dry the skin completely before applying the electrodes.

2. Attach the cclips

lips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them.
3. Place the electrodes on the patient.

4. Attach the lead wires to the E

ECG
CG trunk cable and the
then
n plug the trunk cable into the e
equipment’s
quipment’s ECG
ECG connec
connector.
tor.

5. Connect the ECG trunk cable to the equipment.

6. Switch the Mode Select knob to Monitor.

6-2
6.4.1.1 Placing Electrodes

3-Lead Placement

The following is a typical AHA ele

electrode
ctrode place
placement
ment for a 3-lead ECG set:

 RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.

 LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

 LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.

5-Lead Placement

The following is a typical AHA ele

electrode
ctrode place
placement
ment for a 5-lead ECG set:

 RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.

 LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

 RL placement: on the right lower abdomen.

 LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.

 V placement: on the chest.

The chest (V) electrode can be placed on one of the ffollowing

ollowing posit
positions:
ions:

 V1 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the right sternal border.

 V2 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the left

l eft sternal border

 V3 placement: midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions.

 V4 placement: on the fifth intercostal space at the left midclavicular line.

 V5 placement: on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode
position.

 V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position.

 V3R-V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to

those on the left.

 VE placement: over the xiphoid process.

 V7 placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth
intercostal space.

 V7R placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space.

Electrode Placement for Surgical Patients

The surgical site

site should be ttaken
aken into consid
consideration
eration whe
when
n placing electr
electrodes
odes on a surg
surgical
ical patient, e.g.
e.g. for open-chest
open-chest
surgery, the chest electrodes can be placed on the lateral chest or back. To reduce artifacts and interferen
interference
ce from
electrosurgical
electrosurgical units, you can place the limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower abdomen and the chest
electrodes on the left side of the mid-chest. Do not place the electrodes on the upper arm. Otherwise, the ECG
waveform will be very small.

6-3
 WARNING
 When using electrosurgical units (ESU), place ECG electrodes between the ESU and its grounding plate to
prevent unwanted burns. Never entangle ESU cable and ECG cable together.

 When using electrosurgical units (ESU), never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of the ESU,
as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.

6.4.2 ECG Monitoring with Paddles/Pads

1. Prepare the patient’s skin.

2. Apply the paddles/pads to the patient.

 If multifunction electrode pads are used, apply pads according to the instructions for use indicated on pads
package. Use anterior-lateral
anterior-lateral placement.

 If external paddles are used, remove the paddle set from the paddle tray by grasping the handles and
pulling them straight up. Apply conductive gel to paddle electrodes. Place the paddles to the patient’s
chest using the anterior-late
anterior-lateral
ral placement.

3. If m
multifunction
ultifunction electrode pads are used, connect the p
pads
ads to the pa
pads
ds cable.

4. Connect paddles/pads cable with the equipment if not connected.

Anterior-lateral Paddles/Pads placement

1. Place the RA pad or Sternu

Sternum
m paddle on tthe
he patient’s uppe
upperr right tor
torso,
so, lateral to the sternum and below
below the clavicle,
clavicle,
as shown below.

2. Place the LL pad, o

orr Apex p
paddle
addle to the patient’s left nipple in the m
midaxillary
idaxillary line, with the ccenter
enter of the electrode
electrode
in the midaxillary line, if possible. See the figure below.

Sternum
paddle
RA

LL
Apex paddle

NOTE
 Anterior - lateral placement is the only placement that can be used for ECG monitoring with paddles/pads
accessories.

6-4
6.4.3 Checking Paced Status

It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG. The paced symbol is displayed

when the [Paced

[Paced]] is set to [Y es]. The pace pulse markers “︱” are shown on the ECG wave when the patient has a paced
[ Yes].
signal.

To change the pac

paced
ed status, yyou
ou can select eithe
either:
r:

→ →

 [Main Menu]
Menu] [Patient Demographics>>]
Demographics>>] [Paced], or
Paced],
 The ECG parameter
parameter wind
window
ow to ente
enterr the [[ECG Setup] menu, and then, select [Others>>
ECG Setup] [ Others>>]] [Paced
→ ],
Paced],

and toggle between [Y

[Yes]
es] and [No
[No].
].

Warning
 For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the patient monitor could
mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak. Do not rely entirely on
rate meter alarms when monitoring patients with pacemakers. Always keep these patients under close
surveillance.

 For non-paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [No]. If it is incorrectly set to [Yes], the equipment may be

unable to detect premature ventricular beats (including PVCs).

6.5 ECG Display

The figure below shows the ECG monitoring vie
view
w in 5-lead m
mode.
ode. It is for reference
reference only
only.. Y
Your
our display may be configured
configured
to look slightly different
different..

Lead label Gain Filter mode

Heartbeat icon
Alarm limits

PVC values

HR value
PVCs values is shown only when arrhythmia analysis is switched on. When external paddles or multifunctional electrode
pads are used for ECG monitoring, the PVCs values is shown as “---”.

6-5
6.6 Changing ECG Settings
6.6.1 Change Lead Setting
6.6.1.1 Selecting Lead Type

1. Select the ECG parameter area to enter the [ECG Setup]

Setup] menu.

2. Select [Lead Set]

Set] and toggle between [3-lead
[3-lead],
], [[5-lead
5-lead]] and [12-lead
[12-lead].
].

You can also set lead type in the configuration mode:

1. Press th
the
e Menu button o
on
n the equipment’s front pane
panel.l. In the Main Menu, selec
selectt [[Others >>]
Others >>] [Configuration
→

>>]
>>]→ enter the required password to enter the Configuration Main menu.

2. Select [ECG Setup]

Setup] → [Lead Set]
Set] and toggle between [3-lead
[3-lead],
], [[5-lead
5-lead]] and [12-lead
[12-lead].
].

The settings changed

changed in configu
configuration
ration mode will be saved w
when
hen the equipm
equipment
ent is turned off.

6.6.1.2 Choosing AHA or IEC Lead Placement

1. Select [Main Menu]

Menu] → [Others >>]
>>] →[Configuration >>]
>>] → enter the required password.

2. In the Configuration Main menu, select [ECG Setup]

Setup] → [ECG Standard],
Standard], and then select [AHA
[AHA]] or [IEC
[IEC]] according to
the standard that is applied to your hospital.

6.6.1.3 Choosing the Heart Rate Source

To compute heart
heart rate and to detect and an
analyse
alyse arrhythm
arrhythmia
ia more accurately
accurately,, you can choose
choose a lead of best
best quality
signals as the HR calculation lead. T
To
o do so, select [[ECG1
ECG1]] from the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu and then select the lead you want.

The selected lead should hav

have
e the follo
following
wing character
characteristics:
istics:

 The QRS should be either ccompletely

ompletely abo
above
ve or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic.

 The QRS should be tall and narr

narrow.
ow.

The P-waves
P-waves and T-w
T-waves
aves should be less than 0.2mV
0.2mV..

6-6
6.6.2 Changing ECG Wave Settings
You can select the ECG parameter area to enter the [ ECG Setup]
Setup] menu to set ECG cascade and wave speed. You can also
select the hot keys above the ECG waveform to change ECG lead, size and filter.

 You can press the Lead Select button on the equipment’s front panel or use the Navigation knob to select the
lead hot key above the first ECG waveform to select a lead.

 If the wave is too small or clipped, you can change its size by selecting the Size hot key above the ECG waveform.

 When monitoring ECG through ECG lead set, filter mode is displayed above the first ECG waveform. To change
filter mode, select the filter mode hot key using the Navigation knob.

 During 3/5-lead ECG monitoring, the available filter mode settings are [Monitor
[Monitor],
], [[Therapy], and
Therapy],
[Diagnostic]. The default is [Therapy
Diagnostic]. [ Therapy].
].

 When monitoring ECG through pads/paddles,

pads/paddles, filter mode is always “Therapy” and is not shown.

 In the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, select [Sweep
[ Sweep],
], and then choose an appropriate value. The faster the wave sweeps, the
wider the wave is. You can also access [Sweep
[Sweep]] to adjust wave speed from the [ECG Setup]
Setup] menu in the
Configuration mode.

 In the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, select [ECG
[ ECG Cascade]
Cascade] and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

NOTE
 For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the system may mistake an
internal pace pulse for a QRS or fail to alarm when the pacer is broken.

6.6.3 Switching On or Off the Notch Filter

The notch filter
filter remo
removes
ves the AC
AC line noise. When [[Filter
Filter]] is set to [Monitor
[ Monitor],
], or [Therapy
[Therapy],
], the notch filter is always [On
[On].
].
When [Filter
[Filter]] is set to [Diagnostic
[Diagnostic],
], you can switch the notch filter [On
[ On]] or [Off
[Off] as required.

To switch on or off notch filte

filter,
r, sele
select
ct the ECG paramete
parameterr area to e
enter
nter the [ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, and then select [Others
[Others
>>]
>>] →[Notch Filter]
Filter] and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

Switching on the notch filter is recommended when there is interference with the waveform.

Set notch frequency according to the electric power frequency of your country. Follow this procedure:

1. Press the Main Menu bu

button
tton o
on
n the front pane
panel,l, and then sele
select
ct [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [Configuration >>]
>>] →enter the
required password.

2. Select [ECG Setup]

Setup] → [Notch Filter]
Filter] and then select [50Hz
[50Hz]] or [60Hz
[60Hz]] according to the power frequency.

NOTE
 The setting of Notch Filter will not be changed by restoring to factory default settings nor shutting down
the system.

6-7
6.6.4 Adjusting Heartbeat Volume
In the case that ECG alarm is switched on, or both ECG alarm and PR alarm are switched off, heartbeat tone is issued.
To adjust the heartbeat
heartbeat volume,

 Select the ECG parameter window to enter the [ECG

[ ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, and then select [Others
[ Others >>]
>>] → [QRS Volume],
Volume],
or

 From the Configuration Main menu, select [ECG

[ ECG Setup]
Setup] → [QRS Volume],
Volume],

and then select an appropriate setting

setting.. The heartbeat volume can be set between 0 and 10, in which 0 means off, and 10
is the maximum volume.
When a valid SpO2 value exists, the system will adjust the pitch of the heartbeat tone according to the SpO2 value.

6.7 Arrhythmia Analysis

Arrhythmia analysis provides information about your patient’s
patient’s condition, including heart rate and arrhythmia alarms.

WARNING


Arrhythmia analysis program is intended to detect ventricular arrhythmias. It is not designed to detect
atrial or supraventricular arrhythmias. It may incorrectly identify the presence or absence of an
arrhythmia. Therefore, a physician must analyze the arrhythmia
a rrhythmia information with other clinical findings.

 Arrhythmia analysis is not intended for neonate patients.

6.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events

Arrhythmia event Description Category
Asystole No QRS complex for 4 consecutive seconds (in absence of ventricular fibrillation Lethal
or chaotic signals). arrhythmia
V-Fib/V-Tach A fibrillatory wave for 4 consecutive seconds.
A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit
Vtac The consecutive PVCs > Vtac PVCs limit, and the HR > the Vtac HR limit.
Vent. Brady The consecutive PVCs ≥ the Vbrd threshold and the ventricular HR < the Vbrd
Rate threshold.
Extreme Tachy The heart rate is greater than the extreme tachycardia limit.
Extreme Brady The heart rate is less than the extreme bradycardia limit.
PVCs/min PVCs/min exceeds high limit Nonlethal
PNP** No pace pulse detected for 1.75 x average R-to-R intervals following a QRS arrhythmia
complex (for paced patients only).
PNC** No QRS complex detected for 300 milliseconds following a pace pulse (for
paced patients only).
PVC One PVC detected in normal heartbeats
Couplet Paired PVCs are detected.
VT>2 More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute.
Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V,N, V, N, V.

6-8
Arrhythmia event Description Category
Trigeminy A dominant rhy
rhythm
thm of N, N, V
V,N,
,N, N, V, N, N, V.
R ON T R on T detected in normal heartbeats.
Missed Beats* No beat detected for 1.75x average R-R interval for HR <120, or No beat for 1
second with HR >120 (for non-paced patients only), or No beat detected for
more than the set pause threshold.
Brady The average heart rate is less than 60 bpm.

Tachy The average heart rate is g

greater
reater than 100 bpm.
Vent. Rhythm The consecutive PVCs > the Vbrd PVCs limit, and the HR is between Vbrd Rate
limit and the Vtac Rate limit.
Multif. PVC Multiform PVCs detected in Multif. PVC's Window (which is adjustable).
Nonsus. Vtac The consecutive PVCs < the Vtac PVCs limit but > 2, and HR > the Vtac Rate
limit.
Pause* No QRS detected within the set time threshold of pause.
Irr. Rhythm Consistently irregular rhythm.

*: indicates that this arrhythmia alarm is not presented when [Paced

[Paced]] is set to [Y
[ Yes].
es].
**: indicates that this arrhythmia alarm is not presented when [Paced
[ Paced]] is set to [No
[ No].
].

 When multifunctional electrode pads are used for ECG monitoring, the equipment provides only 4 arrhythmia
alarms, including asystole, ventricular fibrillation/ventricular tachycardia, PNP, and PNC.

 When paddles are used, the equipment provides only 3 arrhythmia alarms, including ventricular
fibrillation/ventricular
fibrillation/ventricular tachycardia, PNP, and PNC.

6.7.2 Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off

To switch arrhyt
arrhythmia
hmia analysis on or off:

1. Select the ECG parameter area to enter the [ECG Setup]

Setup] menu. Select [Arrhythmia
[Arrhythmia >>].
>>].

2. Select [Arrhythmia
Arrhythmia]] and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

Yo
You
u can also switch arrhythmia analysis on or off in the Configuration mode. Follow this procedure: Enter the
Configuration
Configuration Main menu. Select [ECG Setup]
Setup] → [Arrhythmia
Arrhythmia]] and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

6.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings

To change arrhy
arrhythmia
thmia alarm se
settings,
ttings, select the ECG par
parameter
ameter ar
area
ea to ente
enterr the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, and then select
[Arrhythmia >>]
>>] → [Arrh. Alarm]
Alarm] menu, where you can set alarm switch, alarm level and alarm record switch for all the
arrhythmia events.

You can also set arrhythmia alarm properties in the Configuration mode through the ECG Setup menu.

NOTE
 The alarm level for asystole, ventricular fibrillation, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular bradycardia,

extreme bradycardia, and extreme tachycardia alarms is always high and unchangeable. These alarms are
always on. As long as the alarm condition occurs, corresponding alarm will be triggered whether
arrhythmia analysis is switched on or off.

6-9
6.7.4 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings
To change arrhythmia
arrhythmia thresho
threshold
ld settings, se
select >>]→[Arrh. Threshold >>].
lect the ECG parameter window [Arrhythmia >>]
→ >>].

In case an arrhythmia violates its threshold, an alarm will be triggered

triggered.. The setting of Asystole Delay is linked to ARR
relearning.. When HR is less than 30 bpm, it is recommende
relearning recommended
d to set Asystole Delay to 10 seconds.

Arrh. event Range Default Step Unit

PVCs High 1 to 10 10 1 /
Asystole. Delay 2 to 10 5 1 s
Tachyy
Tach 60 to 300 Adult: 120 5 bpm
Pediatric:: 160
Pediatric
Brady 15 to 120 Adult: 50 5 bpm
Pediatric:: 75
Pediatric
Extreme Tachy 60 to 300 Adult: 160 5 bpm
Pediatric:: 180
Pediatric
Extreme Brady 15 to 120 Adult: 35 5 bpm
Pediatric:: 50
Pediatric
Multif. PVCs Window 3 to 31 15 1 Beats

V-Tach
V-Tach Rate 100 to 200 130 5 bpm
V-Tach
V-Tach PVCs 3 to 12 6 1 Beats
Pause Time 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 2.0 / s
Vbrd Rate 15 to 60 40 5 bpm
Vbrd PVCs 3 to 99 5 1 Beats

You can also set arrhythmia threshold from the ECG Setup menu in the configuration mode.

6.7.5 Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually

Normally arrhythmia relearning
relearning allows the equipment to learn new ECG patterns to correct arrhythmia
arrhythmia alarms and heart
rate value. We suggest you to manually initiate arrhythmia relearning when you suspect the result of arrhythmia
analysis.

To initiate relearning
relearning manually
manually,, select the EC
ECG
G parame
parameter
ter window to enter the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu, select [Arrhythmia
[ Arrhythmia
>>]
>>] → [Relearn Arrh.].
Arrh.]. When the equipment is learning, the message “Learning ECG” is displayed in the technical alarm
area.

NOTE
 Arrhythmia relearning in the case of ventricular tachycardia may affect correct arrhythmia alarm.

6-10
6.7.6 Automatic Arrhythmia Relearn
Arrhythmia relearning is initiated automatically whenever:

 The ECG lead or lead label is changed

 The ECG lead is re-connecte

re-connected
d

 Patient category is changed

 The paced status

status is changed,

 Arrhythmia analysis is switched on

 [Stop Calibrating]
Calibrating] is selected after ECG calibration is completed.

6.8 Calibrating ECG

The ECG signal
signal may be inaccurate d
due
ue to hard
hardware
ware or software pr
problems.
oblems. As a result,
result, the ECG
ECG wave amplitude be
becomes
comes
greater or smaller. In that case, you can perform ECG calibration to check if the ECG wave amplitude is in normal range.

1. Select ECG filter hot key. Turn the navigation knob to select [Diagnostic
Diagnostic]] mode.

2. Select the ECG parameter area to enter the [ECG Setup]

Setup] menu.

3. Select [Others >>]

>>] [Calibrate]. In this case, a square wave appears on the screen and the message “Calibrating
Calibrate].
ECG” is displayed.

3. Compare the amplitude

amplitude of the square w
wave
ave with the 1 mV w
wave
ave scale. The difference should be within
within 5%.

4. After the calibration is completed, select [Stop Calibrating].

Calibrating].

You can print out the waveform and wave scale and then measure the difference between them if necessary. If the
difference exceeds 5%, contact your service personnel.

6-11
FOR YOUR NOTES

6-12
7 Resting 12-Lead ECG
7.1 Overview
The optional resting
resting 12-lead EC
ECG
G function is availa
available
ble in Monitor m
mode
ode and allow
allowss you to acquire,
acquire, analyze,
analyze, store
store,, print,
and transmit a 12-lead ECG.

For resting 12-lead ECG, the available filter mode settings are [Diagnostic
[Diagnostic]] and [ST
[ST].
]. The default is [ST
[ ST].
]. When [Filter
[Filter]] is
set to [ST
[ST],
], the notch filter is always [On
[ On].
]. When [Filter
[Filter]] is set to [Diagnostic
[ Diagnostic],
], you can switch the notch filter [On
[ On]] or [Off
[Off]
as required.

7.2 Placing Electrodes

12-lead ECG uses 10 electrodes, which are placed on the patient’s four limbs and chest.

The limb electrodes

electrodes are ty
typically
pically placed on the wrists and a
ankles
nkles on the inside o
off the
four limbs as shown below

 RA: above the right wr

wrist,
ist, inside the rig
right
ht arm, and below the elbow
elbow;;

 LA: above the left wr

wrist,
ist, inside the left arm, and below the elbow;

 RL: above the rig

right
ht ankle, inside the right leg, and below the kne
knee;
e;

 LL: above the lef

leftt ankle, inside the left leg
leg,, and below the kne
knee.
e.

However, you can place the limb electrodes anywhere along the limbs.

The chest electrodes

electrodes are placed on the chest as shown in the figure or accor
according
ding to the patient’s
patient’s actual situation.

 V1: on the fourth intercostal space at the rright

ight st
sternal
ernal b
border.
order.

 V2: on the fourth intercostal space at the left sternal border

 V3: midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions.

 V4: on the fifth inte

intercostal
rcostal space at the le
left
ft midc
midclavicular
lavicular line
line..

 V5: on the left ante

anterior
rior axillar
axillaryy line, horizontal with the V4 electrode
electrode position.
position.

 V6: on the left mid

midaxillary
axillary line
line,, horizontal with the V4 elect
electrode
rode po
position.
sition.

The surgical site

site should be ttaken
aken into co
consideration
nsideration whe
when
n placing electr
electrodes
odes on a
surgical patient, e.g. for open-chest surgery, the chest electrodes can be placed on the lateral chest or back. To reduce

artifacts and interferen

interference
ce from electrosurgical units, you can place the limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower
abdomen and the chest electrodes on the left side of the mid-chest. Do not place the electrodes on the upper arm.
Otherwise, the ECG waveform will be very small.

7-1
 WARNING
 When using electrosurgical units (ESU), place ECG electrodes between the ESU and its grounding plate to
prevent unwanted burns. Never entangle ESU cable and ECG cable together.

 When using electrosurgical units (ESU), never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of the ESU,
as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.

7.3 12-Lead ECG Monitoring

7.3.1 Entering the 12-lead ECG Screen
1. Turn the Mode Select knob to Monitor.

2. Refer to section 6.4.1 ECG Monitoring with Electrodes to prepare patient, apply electrode
electrodes,
s, and connect leadwires
and trunk cable.

3. Press the 12-Lead ECG hardkey on the front panel to enter the full 12-lead ECG screen.

In the 12-lead ECG screen, waveforms are always displayed in the sequence of I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and
V6. You cannot change waveform position. The [Waves
[Waves >>]
>>] option in the Main Menu is disabled

To exit 12-lead ECG

ECG screen
screen,, select the [[Exit 12-lead] softkey or press the 12-Lead ECG hardkey. The equipment also exits
Exit 12-lead]
12-lead ECG screen if you set [Lead
[ Lead Set]
Set] to [3-Lead
[3-Lead]] or [5-Lead
[5-Lead].
].

NOTE
 If the equipment is connected with AC mains, the [Notch Filter] shall be set to [On] to avoid interference on
the acquiring or display of 12-Lead ECG.

7.3.2 Recording Realtime 12-Lead ECG

In the 12-lead ECG screen, press the Record hardkey on the recorder to start realtime recording and print the realtime
12-lead ECG waveform. Press the Record hardkey again to stop the recording.

7-2
7.4 12-lead ECG Analysis
12-lead ECG analysis function is intended for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.

1. In 12-lead ECG screen, press the [Start Acquire]

Acquire] softkey to acquire the patient’s ECG.

2. Input or modify the patient information in the

the pop-up [Patient Demographics]
Demographics] menu. Then select [Ok
[ Ok] to start
12-lead ECG analysis.

NOTE
 Always input the correct patient information before you start 12-Lead ECG analysis because the patient
information, especially age, gender, and race, greatly affect
affec t the interpretation of the acquired ECG.

 If no patient information is inputted, the system will interpret the acquired ECG on the basis of a default of

a 50 years old Caucasian male, which may result in misdiagnosis.

 To display more patient information items like medication and class and so on, select [Main Menu]
[Others >>] [Configuration >>] enter the required password [12-Lead Setup] and then set
corresponding items to [On].

Then, the defibrillator/monit

defibrillator/monitor
or starts ECG acquisition and messages “Acquiring
“Acquiring EC
ECG......
G......” and “Keep ECG electrodes
connected properly.” are presented. It takes about 10 seconds for the defibrillator/monitor to acquire and analyze
12-lead ECG data. During this time, keep the patient still.

If any of the RA, LA, LL, or RL electrodes or trunk cable is detached during data acquisition or analysis, a message “Lead
Off, Cannot Acquire.” will be presented.

During 12-lead ECG acquisition or analysis, you cannot select a parameter window to enter the parameter setup menu.
The Main Menu button
button and the Ev
Event
ent button on the fron
frontt panel are also disabled.

At the completion of ECG analysis, the [12-Lead

[ 12-Lead Report]
Report] menu pops up.

You may press the [Record

[ Record]] button or the [Transmit
[Transmit]] button to print or transmit the 12-lead report.
7-3
 You can also select the drop-down windows to adjust the gain or paper speed.

CAUTION
 Keep the patient still while acquiring or analyzing 12-lead ECG. Motion of patient can lead to potential
misdiagnosis.

NOTE
 The Lead Select hard key is disabled in the 12-lead ECG screen.

 The filter mode is set to [ST] automatically for 12-lead ECG acquiring and analysis.

 If the defibrillator is on a moving vehicle, stop the vehicle when acquiring 12-lead ECG.

For more details about the interpretation of acquired ECG, refer to the Mindray 1 2-Lead ECG Interpretive Program
Physician’s Guide (PN: H-046-003506-00).

7.5 12-Lead Reports

The defibrillator/monitor
defibrillator/monitor automatically stores the 12-lead repo
reports
rts after 12-lead EC
ECG
G analysis. F
Five
ive reports ccan
an be stored
for each patient.

7.5.1 Reviewing 12-Lead ECG Report

You can access stored reports to print or transmit a report. To access the stored reports,

1. Press the Main Menu but

button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Review >>] in the pop-up menu.
Review >>]

2. Select [12-Lead Report >>]

>>] and the stored 12-lead ECG reports are displayed.

3. Select a 12-lead ECG report to check the details.

You may press the [Record

[ Record]] button or the [Transmit
[Transmit]] button to print or transmit the 12-lead report.

The [Record
[Record]] and [Transmit
[Transmit]] buttons are disabled if no 12-lead ECG report is stored.

7-4
7.5.2 Recording 12-Lead ECG Report
1. Check the currently acquired ECG re
report eport as described in 7.5.1 Reviewing 12-Lead ECG
port or select a stored rreport
Report..
Report

2. In the 12-lead Report menu, select the [Record

Record]] button to print the report.

The printout 12-lead ECG report includes:

 Patient information

 12-lead ECG waveforms

 Analysis results (Time, Global measurements,

measurements, critical value, and diagnosis etc.)

 Other key information

information about critical value and diagnosis, refer to the Mindray 12-Lead ECG Interpretive Program
For more information
Physician’s Guide (PN: H-046-003506-00).

7.5.3 Transmitting 12-Lead ECG Report

You can transmit a currently acquired 12-Lead ECG from the 12-Lead ECG Acquire view or transmit a stored 12-lead
report from the 12-lead report view.

1. Check the currently acquired ECG re

report eport as described in 7.5.1 Reviewing 12-Lead ECG
port or select a stored rreport
Report..
Report

2. In the 12-lead Report menu, select the [Transmit

Transmit]] button to print the report.
If your equipment is equipped with a wireless transmission module, you can transmit the 12-lead ECG report to a fax
machine. If your equipment is equipped with a Wi-Fi module and a 3G router (i.e. the PHEIS system), you can send the
12-lead ECG report to a specified CMS.

7.5.3.1 To Fax Machine

12-Lead reports can be transmitted to a fax machine via a wireless transmission module with networking capability. The
wireless transmission module is connected to the multifunctional connector using a Y-cable.
A SIM card bonding fax service is required to support 12-Lead ECG Transmission.

The following figure sho

shows
ws an overview of the tran
transmission
smission process
process..

Wireless
transmission Base Fax machine
module station
BeneHeart

Caution
 Data transmission via wireless transmission module may sometimes be unreliable. A strong signal and
stationary transmission will improve the transmission
tra nsmission success rate.

7-5
 “Wireless Transmission
For further information concerning installing the wireless transmission module, refer to the “Wireless
Module Installation Guide”
Guide” (PN: H-046-001242-00).

In the Transmit menu, you may

 select a site preset in the configuration mode. In this case, the fax number is shown automatically, or

 select [Custom
[Custom]] and then enter the fax No.

Then select [Transmit

[Transmit]] to transmit the report.

A message “12-Lead Report Transmission Complete!” displays if the 12-Lead Report is successfully sent.

Setting Destination Fax Machine

To ensure that a 12-lead report is rreceived

eceived,, we sugge
suggest
st that the d
destination
estination fax m
machine
achine is not co
connected
nnected with an
extension phone and does not enable Call Transfer or Busy Transfer.

For fax machine receiving setup,

setup, taking HP LaserJet M1319fMFP fax machine as an example, we suggest that the fax
machine

 is set to Fax Mode. If the fax machine is set to Automatic Mode, the times of Ring To Answer setting is preferred
1 or 2.

 Enables Fit To Page.

Page.

 Disables Error Correction.

Correction.

 Sets Fax Speed to Slow.

NOTE
 The 12-lead transmission support paper sizes of A4 and Letter.

7-6
12-Lead Transmission Problems

The following table lists the m

messages
essages display
displayed
ed when pr
problem
oblem occu
occurs
rs during 12-lead transmission. Possible
Possible causes and
solutions are also included.
Message Possible cause Possible solution
Trans.. Failed! No T
Trans Trans.
rans. Wireles
Wirelesss tra
transmis
nsmission
sion modu
module
le is n
not
ot co
connect
nnected.
ed. Connect
Connect tthe
he wirele
wireless
ss transm
transmission
ission
Devices Detected. module .Select [Retransmit
[Retransmit]] to try again.
Trans.. Failed! Network is
Trans Poor network signal. Cannot connect the Select [Retransmit
[Retransmit]] to try again.
Unavailable. wireless transmission module to network.
Trans.. Failed! Cannot
Trans Cannot connect to the destination site due to Check fax number, the settings of fax
Reach the Site. wrong fax number; improper fax machine machine and SIM card. Try again.
setting connection overtime, SIM card
short-paid, and etc.
Trans.. Failed! Data T
Trans Trans.
rans. Wireless transmission module disconnected,
disconnected, Check wireless transmission module
Error. poor network signal, improper fax machine connection. Check the settings of fax
setting, or fax machine problem. machine. Select [Retransmit
[Retransmit]] to try again.

7.5.3.2 To CMS

In the Transmit Menu, select a preset site or enter the IP address of the target CMS and then select [Transmit
[Transmit]] to send
the 12-lead ECG report to CMS.

7.6 Changing 12-Lead ECG Settings

7.6.1 Setting Tachy and Brady Threshold
Set the Tachy and Brady threshold before you start 12-Lead ECG analysis.

1. Menu]→[Others >>]
Select [Main Menu] >>]→[Configuration >>]
>>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [12-Lead Setup]

Setup] and then [Tachy
[Tachy (Adu)]
(Adu)] or [Brady
[Brady (Adu)]
(Adu)] to set the Tacky or Brady threshold.

NOTE
 The [Tachy (Adu)] setup is only effective for patients at the age of 18 or above.

 The [Brady (Adu)] setup is only effective for patients at the age of 13 or above.

7-7
7.6.2 Setting V3 Placement
If the V3 electrode is placed on the position of V4R as shown below, you need to set the [[V3 Placement] to improve the
V3 Placement]
accuracy of ECG interpretat
interpretation:
ion:

To set [V3
[V3 Placement]:
Placement]:

1. In 12-Lead ECG screen, select [Patient Info]

Info] and then on the right of the menu to view the next page.

2. Set [V3 Placement]

Placement] to [V4R
[V4R].
].

3. Select [Ok] to confirm the setting.

7.6.3 Selecting QTc Formula

1. Menu]→[Others >>]
Select [Main Menu] >>]→[Configuration >>]
>>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [12-Lead Setup]

Setup] and then set [QTc
[QTc Formula]
Formula] to any of the following:

 Hodges

 Bazett

 Fridericia

 Framingham

For details about QTc formula, refer to the Mindray 12-Lead ECG Interpretive Program Physician’s Guide (PN:
H-046-003506-00).

7.6.4 Setting Baseline Correction Filter

1. In 12-lead ECG mo
monitoring
nitoring m
mode,
ode, selec
selectt the ECG param
parameter
eter window tto
o enter the [ECG
[ECG Setup]
Setup] menu. Select [Others
[Others
>>]
>>]→ [Baseline Correction Filter].
Filter].

2. Select [On
On]] or [Off
[Off] to turn on o r off the baseline correction filter.

NOTE
 The baseline correction function is only for 12-lead ECG monitoring. In 3-lead or 5-lead ECG monitoring,
this function is disabled.

7-8
7.6.5 Setting Patient Information Input Prompt
Select [Main Menu]→[Others >>]
[Main Menu] >>]→[Configuration >>]
>>]→enter the required password→[12-Lead Setup]
Setup]→[Patient
Prompt] and toggle between [On
Info. Input Prompt] [On]] or [Off
[Off] to turn on or off patient information input prompt:

 On: the patient information input prompt is displayed after you select [Start
[Start Acquire]
Acquire] to start 12-lead ECG
analysis.

 Off: the patient information inp

input
ut prompt is not display
displayed
ed after you select
select [Start
[Start Acquire]
Acquire] to start 12-lead
ECG analysis.

NOTE
 It is recommended to turn on the patient information input prompt for your convenience to check the
patient information before you start 12-lead ECG analysis.

7.6.6 Setting 12-Lead ECG Report Content

Select [Main Menu]→[Others >>]
[Main Menu] >>]→[Configuration >>]
>>]→enter the required password→[12-Lead Setup]
Setup]→[Report
Content]] to set the 12-lead ECG report content to [Standard
Content [ Standard]] or [Measurements
[Measurements Only].
Only].

 Stardard: both the me

measurements
asurements and analysis results ar
are
e included in the recorded 12-lead ECG report.
report.

 Measurementss Only: only the m

Measurement measurements
easurements a
are
re included in tthe
he recorde
recorded
d 12-lead ECG

7.6.7 Setting 12-Lead ECG Format

There are
are five options for the fo
format
rmat of prin
printed
ted 12-lead EC
ECG
G reports, nam
namely
ely [3
[3 4], [[3 Compact], [[4
3 4 Compact], 4 3], [[Median
Median
], and [Measurements
Complexes],
Complexes [Measurements Matrix].
Matrix].

To set the for

format
mat of printe
printed
d 12-lead ECG report:

1. Menu]→[Others >>]
Select [Main Menu] >>]→[Configuration >>]
>>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [12-Lead Setup]

Setup] and then select [Report
[Report Format]
Format] to select a format for the printed 12-lead ECG report.

7-9
 Below are examples of printed 12-lead ECG report:

 [3 4]:
1

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

2 3

4
5

 [3 4 Compact]
Compact]

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

7-10
  [Median Complexes]

1 2 3

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

 [Measurements Matrix]

2 1 14

12 13

1. Time of acquisition
2. Patient information
3. Global measurem
measurements
ents
4. Critical value

5. Diagnostic statements
6. Gain
7. Paper speed
8. Notch filter
9. Frequency response
10. Baseline correction filter
11. QT
QTcc formula
12. Software/Algorithm
Software/Algorithm version
13. Serial number
14. Measurements

7-11
7.6.8 Setting up Destination Sites
You can preset up to 8 sites and their fax numbers where the 12-lead ECG may be sent in the configuration mode. You
can use maximum 15 characters to define the site name and maximum 20 digits to define the fax number.

To set the sites and fax number

numbers,
s, enter tthe
he Configura
Configuration
tion Main menu, an
and
d select [[12-Lead
12-Lead Transmission Setup]. Once
Transmission Setup].
having been set, the site and fax numbers will be automatically listed in the [Site
[ Site]] and [Fax
[Fax No.]
No.] options of the 12-Lead

ECG Acquire view and 12-Lead Report view.

7.6.9 Setting Fax Format

The format
format of 12-lead EC
ECG
G report sent to a fax mac
machine
hine can be co
configured.
nfigured. To select the format,
format, enter
enter the Config
Configuration
uration
Main menu, and select [12-Lead
[12-Lead Transmission Setup]→[Next Page]
Transmission Setup] Page]→[Fax Format]
Format] →select [3×4
[3×4],
], [[2×6
2×6]] or [1×12
[1×12].
].

The following
following figure shows an example
example of 3×4 fo
format
rmat rep
report
ort receiv
received
ed by a fax m
machine.
achine.

7.6.10 Setting up Transmission Speed

You can set the 12-lead report transmission speed. To set the transmission speed, enter the Configuration Main menu,
and select [12-Lead Setup]→[Next Page]
[12-Lead Transmission Setup] Page]→[Tr
Transmit
ansmit Speed], and then toggle between [7200
Speed], [7200 bps]
bps] and
[2400 bps].
bps].

NOTE
 The transmission speed is 7200 bps by default. In the case that wireless communication signal is not good,
selecting 2400 bps may improve transmission success rate, but this takes considerably
c onsiderably longer time.

7-12
 7 12

8 AED
8.1 Overview
This chapter describes
describes how to operate tthe
he equipmen
equipmentt in AED Mode
Mode.. While o
operating
perating in AED Mode, the e
equipment
quipment
analyses the patient’
p atient’ss ECG waveform
waveformss and guides you through the defibrillation process.

The equipment
equipment starts analyzing tthe
he patient’s heart rhythm immediat
immediately
ely after ente
entering
ring AED mode.
mode. Wh
When
en a shockable
rhythm is detected, the equipment
equipment gives a prompt and automatically starts charging. If a shockable rhythm is not
detected, a “No shock advised” prompt
prompt is given. Smart defibrillation analysis goes through automated
automated external
defibrillation until the equipment enters CPR or abnormal pads connection occurs.

While operating in AED Mode, the capabilities of the device are limited to those essential to the performance of
semi-automated
semi-automated external defibrillation. Only ECG signals acquired through
through pads are displayed. Previously set alarms and
scheduled measurements
measurements are indefinitely paused and entry of patient information is disabled. Additionally
Additionally,, the Lead
Select, Alarm Pause, NIBP Start/Stop and Main Menu buttons are inactive.

8.2 Safety

DANGER
 Defibrillation current can cause operator or bystander severe injury or even death. Never touch the
patient or any equipment connected to the patient (including the bed or gurney) during defibrillation.

 Avoid contact between parts of the patient’s body such as exposed skin of head or limbs, conductive fluids
such as gel, blood, or saline, and metal objects such as a bed frame
f rame or a stretcher which may provide
unwanted pathways for the defibrillating current.

 Do not allow multifunction electrode pads to touch each other or to touch other ECG monitoring
electrodes, lead wires, dressings, etc. Contact with metal objects may cause electrical arcing and patient
skin burns during defibrillation and may divert current away from the heart.

 To avoid explosion hazard, do not use the equipment in the presence of oxygen-rich atmospheres,
flammable anesthetics, or other flammable agents (such as gasoline). Keep the equipment and the
operating environment dry and clean.

WARNING
 During defibrillation, air pockets between the skin and multifunction electrode pads can cause patient
skin burns. To help prevent air pockets, make sure defibrillation pads are completely adhered to the skin.
sk in.

 Do not use dried-out pads.

 In AED mode, this equipment is not designed to administer energy at pediatric joule settings. The
American Heart Association recommends AEDs be used only on patients who are more than eight years
old.
 81

CAUTION
 Aggressive handling of multifunction electrode pads in storage or prior to use can damage the pads.
Discard the pads if they become damaged.

 For patients with implantable pacemaker, the sensitivity and specificity of AED algorithm may be
impaired.

8.3 AED View

A typical screen in AED Mode is shown below.

In AED mode, HR numeric and one ECG waveform acquired from the multifunction electrode pads are displayed. Below
the ECG is the information area which displays the defibrillation mode, prompt message, contact impedance indicator,
selected energy and a shock counter.

For details about the contact impedance indicator, refer to 9.7 Contact Impedance Indicator.
Indicator.

8.4 AED Procedure

Confirm that the patient is unresponsive
unresponsive,, not breathing or not breathing normally.

Then:

1. Remove clothing from the patient’s chest. Wipe moisture from the patient’s chest and, if necessary,
necessary, clip or
or shave
excessive chest hair.

2. Apply multifu
multifunction
nction electr
electrode
ode pads to the p
patient
atient as di
directed
rected o
on
n the pads package. Use anterior-lateral
anterior-lateral placement.

3. Connect the pads with pads cable, and then plug the pads cable in the eq
equipment’s
uipment’s therapy
therapy p
port.
ort.

4. Turn the Mode Select knob to AED.

 82

When the equipment enters AED mode, it checks to see if the pads
p ads and pads cable are properly connected.
connected. If not, the
message “Connect
“Connect Pads Cable”
Cable” or “Apply
“Apply Pads”
Pads” will appear in the AED information area until corrective action has been
taken.

5. Follow the screen and voice prompts.

Once an ECG is detected through the multifunction electrode pads, the equipment automatically analyzes the patient’s
heart rhythm and warns you not to touch the patient. If a shockable rhythm is detected, the equipment charg
charges
es
automatically.

You can switch on/off the voice prompt by accessing configuration management or adjust the volume of the voice
prompts by pressing the voice volume soft key.

6. Press the Shock button, if prompted.

Once charging is complete, the equipment gives prompt “Do

“Do Not Touch Patient! Press Shock Button”.
Button ”. Make sure no
one is touching the patient, bed or any equipment connect
connected
ed to the patient. Call out clearly and loudly ““Stay Clear”.
Stay Clear”
Then press the Shock button o
on
n the front panel to deliv
deliver
er a shock to tthe
he patient.

Delivery of the shock is confirmed by the voice and screen prompt "Shock
"Shock Delivered"
Delivered" and the shock counter on the
display is updated to reflect the number of shocks given. If the configured [Shock
[Shock Series]
Series] is greater than one, the
equipment resumes analyzing the patient’s rhythm after the shock is delivered to see if the shock was successful. Voice
and text prompts continue to guide you through additional shocks.

NOTE
 Do not use anterior-posterior pads placement (multifunction electrode pads placed on the patient’s chest
and back). The AED algorithm used by the equipment has not been validated using this placement.

 Motion artifact may delay analysis or affect the

t he ECG signal resulting in an inappropriate shock or no shock
advised message. Keep the patient still during ECG rhythm analysis.

 The Shock button must be pressed to deliver a shock. The equipment will not automatically deliver a
shock.

 Impedance is the resistance between the defibrillator’s pads or paddles that the defibrillator must
overcome to deliver an effective discharge of energy. The degree of impedance differs from patient to
patient and is affected by several factors including the presence of chest hair, moisture, and lotions or
powders on the skin. If the “Impedance too high. Shock not delivered” message appears, make sure that
the patient’s skin has been washed and dried and that any chest hair has been clipped. If the message
persists, change the pads and/or the pads cable.
 83

8.5 Shock Advised

If a shockable rhythm is detected, the equipment automatically charges to the pre-configure
pre-configured
d energy level. A charging
tone is sounded, and the Shock button flashes when the equipment is fully charged.

Heart rhythm analysis continues while the equipment charges.

charges. If a rhythm change is detected befor
before
e the shock is
delivered and a shock is no longer appropriate, the stored energy is removed internally.

Once you are prompted "Do

"Do Not Touch Patient! Press Shock Button",
Button ", if you do not do so within the configured Auto
Disarm time interval, the equipment disarms itself and resumes analyzing.

When the equipment is being charged or have been fully charged, you can remove the charged energy at any time by
pressing the [Pause
[Pause for CPR]
CPR] soft key.

For defibrillation of adult patients, recommended energy level is 200 Joules.

8.6 No Shock Advised (NSA)

If a shockable rhythm is not detected, the equipment will tell you ""No Advised!".
No Shock Advised!"

 If the [NSA
[NSA Action]
Action] is set to [CPR
[ CPR]]

The equipment
equipment enters CP
CPR
R status and yo
you
u will see and he
hear
ar ““No CPR.”
No Shock Advised! Paused. If Needed, Begin CPR.”
The remaining pause time is displayed as show
shown
n below. The pau
pause
se period can be defined by setting
setting [CPR
[CPR Time]
Time]
through configuration management.

Analysis resumes at the completion of the pause period or when you press the [[Resume Analyzing]] soft key in CPR
Resume Analyzing
status.

 If the [NSA
[NSA Action]
Action] is set to [Monitor
[ Monitor]]

The equipment
equipment continues to monitor the ECG and autom
automatically
atically resum
resumes
es analysis if a pot
potentially
entially shockable rhythm
rhythm
is detected. You will hear “No
“ No Shock Advised! If needed press pause for CPR”.
CPR ”. The message "No
"No Shock Advised!"
Advised!"
and “Monitoring
“Monitoring”” are shown circularly in the AED information area.

You can define the frequency of these prompts by adjusting [Voice

[ Voice Prompts Interval]
Interval] through configuration
management.
management. You may press the [Pause for CPR]
CPR] soft key to suspend monitoring and administer CPR. The pause
period can be defined by setting [CPR
[ CPR Time]
Time] through configuration management.
 8-4

8.7 CPR
If [[Initial Time] is not configured as Off, the system enters initial CPR if AED mode is entered. You can set [Initial
Initial CPR Time] [Initial
Time] to an appropriate time or switch it off through configuration manageme
CPR Time] management.
nt.

After the shock series, ECG analysis pauses and the equipment enters
enters the CPR status. Analysis resumes at the completion
of the pause period or when you press the [Resume
[ Resume Analyzing
Analyzing]] soft key in CPR status.

In current shock series, the equipment enters the CPR status if you press the [Pause
[ Pause for CPR]
CPR] soft key after a shock is
delivered. The CPR pause time is defined by setting [CPR
[ CPR Time]
Time] through configuration management.

NOTE
 You can start analyzing patient’s heart rhythm again at any time by pressing the [Resume Analyzing] soft
key in CPR status.

8.7.1 CPR Metronome

The equipment
equipment provides a CPR metr
metronome
onome fea
feature
ture that ca
can
n be used to e
encourage
ncourage rescuers to perform chest
compression
compression and ventilation at AHA/ERC recomme
recommended
nded rate.

When activated, the metronome sounds 120 times per minute and give voice prompts to indicate the rescuers to
perform ventilation at configured compression/ventilation
compression/ventilation rate.

To activate or d
deactivate
eactivate CPR m
metronome
etronome,,

1． Move the Mode Select knob to Monitor, Manual Defib or Pacer.

Pacer. Press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and
then select → [Others
[Others >>]
>>] [Configuration >>]
→ >>] Enter the required password.
→

2. Select [AED Setup]

Setup] → [CPR Metronome],
Metronome], and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

The CPR metronome

metronome is activated by de
default.
fault. Whe
When
n CPR metr
metronome
onome is on, yyou
ou can set the compression/ve
compression/ventilation
ntilation rate
by selecting [CPR
[CPR Mode].
Mode]. The default rate is 30:2.

Warning
 The CPR metronome sounds do not indicate information regarding the patient’s condition. Because
patient status can change in a short time, the patient should be assessed at all times. Do not perform CPR
on a patient who is responsive or is breathing normally.

NOTE
 CPR metronome and its volume is affected by the settings of [Voice Prompt] and [Voice Volume] in the AED
Setup menu.
 8-5

8.8 AED Sound Recording

The equipment
equipment include a ssound
ound reco
recording
rding fucntio
fucntion
n that can re
record
cord the voice inform
information
ation during AED therapy
therapy.. The
sound recording function can be configured on or off.

To switch on or
or off the sound
sounding
ing recordin
recording,
g,

1. Move the Mode Sele

Select
ct knob to Monitor, Manu
Manual
al Defib or Pacer. Pre
Press
ss the Main Menu button on the front panel, and
then select → [Others
[Others >>]
>>] [Configuration >>]
→ >>] →Enter the required password.

2. Select [AED Setup]

Setup] → [Voice Recording],
Recording], and toggle between [On
[On]] and [Off
[Off].

The symbol
symbol is shown at the top right ccorner
orner of the AED inform
information
ation area if the sounding rrecording
ecording fun
function
ction is
enabled.

The equipment
equipment can store up to 180 min
minutes,
utes, maxim
maximum
um 60 minute
minutess for one p
patient,
atient, of sound recording.
recording.

8.9 AED Setup

1. Move the Mode Sele
Select
ct knob to Monitor, Manu
Manual
al Defib or Pacer. Pre
Press
ss the Main Menu button on the front panel, and
then select → [Others
[Others >>]
>>] [Configuration >>]
→ >>] →Enter the required password.

2. Select [AED Setup>>]

Setup>>] to enter the AED Setup menu, and then change AED settings as desired.

Refer to Section 24.3.3 AED Setup Menu for details.

 8-6

9 Manual Defibrillation
9.1 Overview
This chapter explains
explains how to pr
prepare
epare ffor
or and perform asynchronous defibrillation and synchronous
synchronous car
cardioversion
dioversion using
multifunction electrode pads and external paddles.

In Manual Defib Mode, you must assess the ECG waveforms

waveforms,, decide if defibrillation or cardioversion is indicated, select
appropriate energy setting, charge the equipment, and deliver the shock. Text messages and a contact impedance
indicator on the screen provide relevant information to guide your throughout the defibrillation process.

While operating manual defibrillation, besides ECG you can select to monitor up to three parameters from SpO2, NIBP,
CO2, IBP and Temp. You can define the parameters to be monitored through configuration management. All the
monitored parameters, except ECG, are switched off by default.

In Manual Defib mode, if NIBP measuremen

measurementt is being taken when you press the Charge button, the equipment stops
NIBP measurements. You can start NIBP manually only after charging is completed or when the energy is removed.

Alarms are turned off automatically when you enter Manual Defib mode. Pressing the Alarm Pause button can turn on
the alarms.

9.2 Safety

DANGER

 Defibrillation current can cause operator or bystander severe injury or even death. Never touch the
patient or any equipment connected to the patient (including the bed or gurney) during defibrillation.

 Avoid contact between parts of the patient’s body such as exposed skin of head or limbs, conductive fluids
such as gel, blood, or saline, and metal objects such as a bed frame
f rame or a stretcher which may provide
unwanted pathways for the defibrillating current.

 Do not allow multifunction electrode pads and paddles to touch each other or to touch other ECG
monitoring electrodes, lead wires, dressings, etc. Contact with metal objects may cause electrical
e lectrical arcing
and patient skin burns during defibrillation and may divert current away from the heart.

 During manual defibrillation, make sure your hands are dry and free from conductive gel to avoid shock
hazard.

 Use care when operating this equipment close to oxygen sources (such as bag-valve-mask devices or

ventilator tubing). Turn off gas source or move source away from
f rom patient during defibrillation. This can
cause an explosion hazard.
 9-1

WARNING
 During synchronous cardioversion, if monitoring patient’s ECG through external paddles, artifact
introduced by paddle movement may resemble an R-wave and trigger a defibrillation shock.

 Do not use conductive liquid. Use only conductive gel specified by the equipment manufacturer.

 If external paddles are used for defibrillation, apply the paddles tightly and evenly to the patient’s chest to
ensure good skin contact.

 Never apply the paddles to human body to verify paddle connection.

 Clinicians must select an appropriate energy level for defibrillation of pediatric patients.

CAUTION
 Use of Manual Defib mode may be password protected. Make sure the operator knows and remembers the
password as defined in Configuration. Failure to enter correct password will prevent the delivery of
manual defibrillation therapy.


Clear the conductive gel from the external paddles at the completion of the therapy to prevent the
paddles from being corroded.

 Prior to using this defibrillator, disconnect from the patient all equipment that is not
defibrillator-protected.

NOTE
 Impedance is the resistance between the defibrillator’s pads or paddles that the defibrillator must
overcome to deliver an effective discharge of energy. The degree of impedance differs from patient to
patient and is affected by several factors including the presence of chest hair, moisture, and lotions or
powders on the skin. If the “Impedance too high. Shock not delivered” message appears, make sure that
the patient’s skin has been washed and dried and that any chest hair has been clipped. If the message
persists, change the pads and/or the pads cable.

 Alarms are switched off automatically and the “Alarm Off” message is displayed when the equipment
enters the asynchronous defibrillation mode. Alarms remain off until toggled on by pressing the Alarm
Pause button, the Sync mode is entered, or the Mode Select knob is moved to Monitor or Pacer.
 9-2

9.3 Manual Defibrillation View

A typical screen in Manual Defib Mode is shown below.

In the enlarged ECG area, an ECG waveform and related parameters are displayed. In the middle of the screen,
defibrillation mode, synchronous icon, prompt message, selected energy, contact impedance indicator (configurable),

and a shock counter are displayed.

9.4 Manual Defibrillation Procedure

1. Remove clothing from the patient’s chest. Wipe m
moisture
oisture fro
from
m the pa
patient’s
tient’s chest and, if nec
necessary,
essary, clip or shave
excessive chest hair.

2. Connect the ther

therapy
apy cable to the therapy port. P
Push
ush until you he
hear
ar it click into place.

3. Apply multifunction electrode pads o

orr external
external paddles to the p
patient.
atient.

 If multifunction electrode pads are used, apply pads according to the instructions for use indicated on pads
package. Use anterior-lateral or anterior-poste
anterior-posterior
rior placement.

 If external paddles are used, remove the paddle set from the paddle tray by grasping the handles and

pulling them straight up. Apply conductive gel to the electrode surface of each paddle. Place the paddles to
the patient’s chest using the anterior-lateral placement.

Do not touch this surface and the part below.

 9-3

WARNING
 Hold only the insulating parts of the paddle handles to avoid shock hazard during charging or shock
delivery.

4. Turn the Mode Select knob to Manual Defib.

You can access manual therapy directly, by confirmation or by password, which can be defined through
configuration management.
management. The default setting is [[Direct].
Direct].

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Direct

Manual Therapy Access] [Direct],
], the equipment directly enters Manual Defib mode when the
Mode Select knob is switched to Manual Defib.

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Confirmed

Manual Therapy Access] [Confirmed],
], a dialog box pops up when the Mode Select knob is
switched to Manual Defib. You have to confirm whether to enter Manual Defib mode or not.

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Password

Manual Therapy Access] [Password],
], a dialog box pops up, requiring the user to enter a
password, when the Mode Select knob is switched to Manual Defib. The equipment enters Manual Defib
mode only after correct password is entered.

5. Select energy.

You can select desired energy level by the adjusting the Energy Select buttons on the equipment’s front panel or
the Energy Select buttons on external paddles if external paddles are used.

Your current energy selection

selection is shown in the defibrillation information area as shown below.

6. Charge

Press the Charge button on the front panel. If external paddles are used, the Charge button on the paddles may be
used instead. As the equipment charges, a progress bar is shown in the defibrillation information area. A charging

tone sounds until desired energy level is reached, when you will hear a charge done tone.
If you have to increase or decrease the selected energy during charging or after charging is complete, adjust the Energy
Select button to select the desired energy level as explained above. Then press the charge button again to restart
charging.

To remove the energ

energy,
y, press
press the [Disarm
[Disarm]] soft key. If the Shock button is not pressed within the specified time period,
the equipment disarms automatically. You can define [Time
[ Time to Auto Disarm]
Disarm] through configuration management
management..

7. Shock

Confirm that a shock is still indicated and that the equipment has charged to the selected energy level. Make sure
no one is touching the patient, bed or any equipment connected to the patient. Call out loudly and clearly, ““Stay
Stay
Clear!””
Clear!

 If pads are used, press the flashing Shock button on the front panel to deliver a shock to the patient.
 9-4

 If external paddles are used, simultaneously press the Shock buttons located on the paddles to deliver a
shock to the patient.

NOTE
 Defibrillation is always performed through paddles or pads. However, during defibrillation you may
choose to monitor the ECG using an alternate ECG source (3- or 5-lead monitoring electrodes). If an
alternate ECG source is connected, any available lead may be displayed.

 When external paddles are used, the Shock button on the equipment’s front panel is disabled.

 For defibrillation of adult patients, recommended energy level is 200 Joules.

9.4.1 Using Pediatric Paddles

The external paddle
paddle set com
comes
es with pediat
pediatric
ric paddles include
included.
d. T
To
o use the pediatric
pediatric paddle set, depress
depress the latch at
at the
front of the external paddle set while pulling forward on the adult paddle electrodes.

To defibrillate, rrefer
efer to tthe
he proced
procedure
ure as described in Section 9.4 Manual Defibrillation Procedure.
described Procedure.

9.4.2 Using Internal Paddles

To defibrillate using internal paddle
paddles:
s:

1. Turn on tthe
he d
defibrillator
efibrillator and enter the manual defib mode.

2. Select the appropriate paddle size.

3. Connect the paddles to the defibrilla

defibrillator
tor by aligning the white pointe
pointerr on th
the
e paddles cable with the arrow on the
therapy port. Push until you hear it click into place.

4. Select energy by pressing the Ener

Energy
gy Se
Select
lect key on the equipment's front pane
panel.l.

5. Place the conductive surface of paddle ele

electrodes
ctrodes ag
against
ainst the pat
patient's
ient's right atrium and left ventri
ventricle,
cle, as shown in
the figure below:

6. Charge the d
defibrillator
efibrillator by pre
pressing
ssing the Charge key o
on
n the front panel.

7. Make sure no one is touching the patie

patient
nt or anything co
connected
nnected to the patient.
8. Press the Shock key on the front panel.
 9-5

Using internal paddles for synchronized cardioversion requires that the patient’s ECG be acquired through a standard
ECG cable. The patient’s ECG acquired through the internal paddles may be unreliable for synchronized cardioversion
due to excessive noise or artifact
ar tifact causing inappropriate R-wave detection.

NOTE
 When internal paddles are used for defibrillation, the energy selection is automatically limited to 50 joules
because of possible cardiac damage from higher energies.

 Sterilize the internal paddles before each use. Otherwise, severe infection may result.

 Clean the internal paddles after each use.

9.5 Synchronized Cardioversion

Synchronized Cardioversion allows you to synchronize delivery of the defibrillator shock with the R-wave of the ECG. You
may choose to perform synchronized cardioversion through either:

 Multifunction electrode pads, or

 External paddles

To use synchronized
synchronized cardio
cardioversion,
version, pr
press
ess the [[Enter Sync] soft key in the asynchronous defibrillation mode. Then “Sync”
Enter Sync]
appears in the manual Defibrillation information area and a marker appears above each R-wave, see the figure below:

Sync marker

R-wave marker

You can monitor ECG through multifunction electric pads, or external paddles, or electrodes
electrodes connected to a 3- or 5-lead
ECG cable. Shock is delivered through either pads or paddles.For synchronized cardioversion, we recommend to acquire
patient’s ECG through ECG lead set

NOTE
 When you enter synchronous cardioversion, monitoring alarms is reactivated autonomously.
 9-6

9.5.1 Performing Synchronized Cardioversion

1. Connect the therapy cable and apply tthe
he multifu
multifunction
nction elec
electrode
trode pads or external
external paddles to
to the patient.
patient. If ECG set
is used for ECG monitoring, connect the ECG trunk cable and apply the ECG electrodes to the patient, referring to 6
Monitoring ECG.
ECG.

2. With the
the Mode Select knob in the Manu
Manual
al Defib position, pr
press
ess the [Enter Sync
Sync]] soft key to activate the
synchronous cardioversion function.

3. Select a lead. The selected lead should have a clear signa

signall and a large Q
QRS
RS comple
complex.
x.

4. Verify tha
thatt a white R-wave ma
marker
rker appears above each R-wave, as sho
shown
wn in the figure be
below.
low. If tthe
he R-wave markers
do not appear or do not coincide with the R-waves, for example above the T-waves, select another lead.

5. Verify that
that the e
equipment
quipment e
enters
nters the Sync mode
mode,, as indicate
indicated
d by the SYNC mark shown in the defibrillation
information area.

6. Press the E
Energy
nergy Select button to se
select
lect a desired energy level.

7. Press the Charge but

button
ton on th
the
e equipme
equipment’s
nt’s front panel or, if using exte
external
rnal paddles, tthe
he Charge button locate
located
d on
the handle of Apex paddle.

8. Confirm that
that a shock is still indicated and that tthe
he equipm
equipment
ent has char
charged
ged to the selected
selected energy
energy level. Make
Make sure
no one is touching the patient, bed or any equipment connected to the patient. Call out loudly and clearly, “Stay
“Stay
”.
Clear!”.
Clear!

9. Press and hold the Sho

Shock
ck button oon
n the eq
equipment
uipment o
or,
r, if using external pad
paddles,
dles, the S
Shock
hock buttons on both
paddles. The shock will be delivered when the next R-wave is detected.

NOTE
 During synchronized cardioversion, it is important to continue to hold the shock button (or the paddle’s
Shock buttons) until the shock is delivered. The equipment shocks with the next detected R-wave.

9.5.2 Delivering Additional Synchronized Shocks

If additional synchronized shocks are indicated, perform the following steps:

1. Make sure the equipm

equipment
ent is still in Sync m
mode,
ode, as in
indicated
dicated by the prese
presence
nce of the Sync message
message in the

defibrillation information area.

2. Repeat Steps 4 to 9 as described above.

If [[Sync
Sync after Shock] is set to [Y
[ Yes],
es], the equipment remains in the sync mode after a shock is delivered; if set to [No], the
No],
equipment exits the sync mode and enters the asynchronous defibrillation mode after a shock.

9.5.3 Disabling the Sync Function

To switch off the Sync function, pr
press
ess the [[Sync
Sync Off] soft key to enter the Manual Defib mode. .
 9-7

9.6 Remote Synchronized Cardioversion

The equipment
equipment can be co
configured
nfigured to receiv
receive
e an ECG sou
source
rce fr
from
om a remote
remote patient monitor (such as a bedside patie
patient
nt
monitor) to perform synchronized cardioversion. To do so, the remote patient monitor shall have a sync out connector
and shall be connected to the defibrillator/monitor’s multifunctional connector with a synchronous cable.

To switch on remote
remote synchr
synchronization,
onization, select [[Manual Setup]
Manual Defib Setup] →
[Remote Sync]
Sync] →
[On
On]] through the Configuration
Main Menu.

The remote
remote synchro
synchronization
nization proc
procedure
edure is as follows:

1. Use a sy
sync
nc cable to connect the defibrillator/m
defibrillator/monitor
onitor wit
with
h a bedside monitor through the defibrillator/m
defibrillator/monitor’s
onitor’s
multifunctional connector.

2. Switch on the equipment and enter the Manual Defib mode.

3. Press the [Enter Sync]

Sync] soft key. In this case the “Select
“Select Sync Mode”
Mode” dialog pops up.

4. Select [Remote
Remote]] to enter remote synchronizat
synchronization.
ion. Then the message ““Remote Sync” is presented.
Remote Sync”

5. Confirm a square wave on the de

defibrillator/monit
fibrillator/monitor
or blinks wit
with
h each det
detected
ected R wave on the rem
remote
ote monit
monitor
or as
shown below, indicating a sync pulse is received.

6 Connect the the

therapy
rapy cable to the th
therapy
erapy port. Push unt
untilil you hear it click into place
place..

7 Apply multifunction electrode pads or external paddles to the patient.

8 Follow Steps 6 through 9 from 9.5.1 Performing Synchronized Cardioversion as described previously.
 9-8

NOTE
 During remote synchronous defibrillation, the local defibrillator/monitor does not display the ECG
waveform. To view the patient’s ECG, check the remote monitor.

 When you use an remote monitor as the ECG source, a biomedical technician must verify that the remote
monitor and the defibrillator/monitor combination will deliver a synchronized shock within 60 ms of the
peak of the R-wave.

9.7 Contact Impedance Indicator

Contact impedance indicator is used to indicate the impedance between the defibrillator’s pads or paddles in Manual
Defib or AED mode, as shown below:

Contact Impedance
Indicator

Differentt levels of the measured impedance are shown as follows:

Differen

 indicates the impedance is in normal range.

 indicates the impedance is slightly higher for the defibrillation.

 indicates the impedance is too high for the defibrillation or the pads or paddles are not

properly connected to the patient.

 indicates the therapy cable is not properly connected.

To switch on the contact imped

impedance
ance indicator
indicator::

1. In Monitor,
Monitor, Manual Defib or Pacer mode, pr
press
ess the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select→
button
>>]→[Configuration >>]
[Others >>] >>]→Enter the required password.

2. Select [Manual Defibrillation]

Defibrillation] and set [Contact
[Contact Impedance Indicator]
Indicator] to [On
[On].
].

Note
 It is recommended to perform defibrillation on a patient when the contact impedance is in normal range.
However, you can also perform defibrillation when the contact impedance is slightly higher.
 9-9

FOR YOUR NOTES

 9-10

10 Noninvasive Pacing
10.1 Overview
In pacer mode, the patient’s ECG is monitored through ECG lead set and pace pulses are delivered through multifunction
electrode pads. The pads cannot be used to monitoring ECG rhythm and deliver pacing current at the same time.

A white pacing marker is shown on the ECG waveform

waveform each time a pacer pulse is delivered to the patient. If pacing in
demand mode, white R-wave marker also appears on the ECG waveform until capture occurs.

During pacing, parameters except Resp continue to be monitored and parameter alarms remain active.

In demand mode pacing, a 3-lead or 5-lead ECG cable and electrodes are required to acquire ECG signal. Pace pulses are
delivered through multifunction electrode pads. However, the pads cannot be used to monitor the ECG and deliver pace
pulses simultaneously
simultaneously..

NOTE

 In Pacer mode, arrhythmia analysis is supported and available arrhythmia alarms are asystole, ventricular
vibrillation and ventricular tachycardia.

10.2 Safety

WARNING

 Heart rate displays and alarms function

f unction during pacing, but they can be unreliable. Observe the patient
closely while pacing. Do not rely on the indicated heart rate or heart rate alarms as a measure of the
patient’s perfusion status.

 To avoid explosion hazard when pacing a patient who is receiving oxygen delivery, properly route the
oxygen delivery tube. Do not keep it close to the multifunction electrode pads.
 10-1

CAUTION
 Use of Pacer mode may be password protected. Make sure the operator knows and remembers the
password as defined in Configuration. Failure to enter correct password will prevent the delivery of pacing
therapy.

 For treatment of patients with implanted devices such as permanent pacemakers or

cardioverter-defibrillators, consult
consult a physician and the instructions for use provided by the device’s
manufacturer

 Prolonged noninvasive pacing may cause patient skin irritation and burns. Periodically inspect the
underlying skin and change ECG electrodes and multifunction electrode pads.

NOTE

 If pacing is interrupted for any reason, the [Start Pacing] soft key must be pressed to resume pacing.

 In pacer mode, you cannot change the patient’s internal paced status from the ECG Setup menu.

 In the case that pads poorly contact the patient, the alarm “Pacer Stopped Abnormally” and “Pads Off”

may be presented.
 Pads are not an available choice for the source of ECG waveform in Pacer mode.

10.3 Pacing View

A typical screen in pacer Mode is shown below.

In pacer mode, an ECG waveform, related parameters and waveforms are displayed. The pacer information area shows
the pacer mode, pacer rate and output, as well as pacer-related prompts and alarms. Soft keys available for setting
pacing functions are also displayed.
 10-2

10.4 Demand Mode versus Fixed Mode

The equipment
equipment can deliver paced pulses in e
either
ither demand or fixed mode.

 In demand mode, the pacer only delivers paced pulses when the patient’s heart rate is lower than the selected
pacing rate.

 In fixed mode, the pacer delivers paced pulses at the selected rate.

During pacing, you can change pacer mode. Then the equipment continues to deliver pace pulses at selected pacer rate
and pacer output.

CAUTION
 Use demand mode pacing whenever possible. Use fixed mode pacing if noise or artifact interferes with
proper sensing of R-wave or when monitoring electrodes are not available.

 During fixed mode pacing, R-wave markers do not appear on the paced beats.

 During demand mode pacing, spontaneous beats may be presented which are not associated with the
delivery of pace pulse. If the patient’s
p atient’s heart rate is above the pacer rate, pace pulses are not
n ot delivered and,
therefore, pacing markers do not appear.

10.5 Preparing for Pacing

1. If not pre-connected
pre-connected,, connect the pads ca
cable
ble to the equipment
equipment.. Then push until you hear it click into place.
place.

2. Make sure the mult

multifunction
ifunction electrode
electrode pads packaging is intact and within the ex
expiration
piration date
date shown.

3. Connect the pads connector to the pads cable.

4. Apply the
the pads to the patient using a
anterior-lateral
nterior-lateral or ant
anterior-posterio
erior-posteriorr placement.
placement.

5. If pacing in demand mode, apply monitoring electrodes

electrodes,, and conne
connect
ct the ECG
ECG cable tto
o the equipment.
equipment. To get the
best monitoring signal, make sure there is adequate space between ECG electrodes and therapy electrodes. Refer
to 6.4.1 ECG Monitoring with Electrodes.
Electrodes.
 10-3

10.5.1 Demand Mode Pacing

To pace in demand mode:

1. Turn the Mode Selec

Selectt knob to the Pace
Pacerr position. Thus the pac
pacing
ing function is enabled in demand mode
automatically. ECG waveform of Lead II is displayed in the waveform area by default.

You can access manual therapy directly, by confirmation or by password, which can be defined through
configuration management.
management. The default setting is [[Direct].
Direct].

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Direct

Manual Therapy Access] [Direct],
], the equipment directly enters Pacer mode when the Mode
Select knob is switched to Pacer.

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Confirmed

Manual Therapy Access] [Confirmed],
], a dialog box pops up when the Mode Select knob is
switched to Pacer. You have to confirm whether to enter Pacer mode or not.

 If [[Manual Access] is set to [Password

Manual Therapy Access] [Password],
], a dialog box pops up, requiring the user to enter a
password, when the Mode Select knob is switched to Pacer. The equipment enters Pacer mode only after
correct password is entered.

2. Select a lead with an easily detectable R-wave.

3. Verify tthat
hat white R-wave m
markers
arkers appear above the R-waves, as sh
shown
own in the figure be
below.
low. If th
the
e R-wave markers do
not appear or do not coincide with the R-waves, for example above the T-waves, select another lead.

4. Select pace
pacerr rate. If necessary
necessary,, select iinitial
nitial pacer o
output.
utput. To sselect
elect pace
pacerr rate o
orr pacer output, rot
rotate
ate the Navigation
knob to select an appropriate value and press it to confirm the selection. Do not forget to press the Navigation
knob to exit the setting after desired value is selected.

5. Press the [Start Pacing]

Pacing] soft key to start pacing. The message ““Pacing
Pacing”” appears in the pacer information area.

NOTE

 Pacing will not start if there

ther e is a problem with the pads cable connection, pad patient connection, or ECG
monitoring electrodes connection. If either situation occurs, a message will appear in the pacer
information area to alert you that a lead is disconnected or that the pads have a poor connection.

6. Verify that whi

white
te pacin
pacing
g mar
markers
kers appe
appear
ar on the EC
ECG
G wa
waveform,
veform, as show
shown
n below:

Pacing mark
 10-4

7. Adjust pacer
pacer output: increase pace
pacerr output until cardiac capture oc
occurs
curs (captur
(capture
e is indicated
indicated by tthe
he appearance of a
QRS complex after each pacing marker), and then decrease the output to the lowest level that still maintains
capture.

8. Verify the presence of a peripheral pulse.

Yo
You
u can temporarily withhold pacing pulse and observe the patient’s
patient’s underlying rhythm by pressing and holding the
[4:1
4:1]] soft key. This causes pacing pulse to be delivered at 1/4 of the defined pacer rate. To resume pacing at set rate,
release this key.

To stop pacing, pr
press
ess the [[Stop Pacing] soft key. Pressing the [Start
Stop Pacing] [Start Pacing]
Pacing] soft key can resume pacing.

CAUTION
 Routinely assess the patient’s cardiac output.

10.5.2 Fixed
To pace Mode
in fixed mode:Pacing
fixed

1. Turn the Mode Select knob to the Pacer position.

2. Switch the pacer to the Fixed mode. To do so, move the cursor to the Pacer Mode hot key and rotate the
Navigation knob to select [Fix
[ Fix Mode];
Mode]; then press it to confirm the selection, see the figure below:

Pacer mode
hot key

3. If ECG electrodes are applied, use the Lead Sele

Select
ct button to select the desired
desired lead for
for viewing.

4. Select pacer
pacer rate. If necessary
necessary,, select pacer outpu
output.
t. To selec
selectt pacer rate or pacer output,
output, rotate the Navigation
Navigation knob
to select an appropriate value and press it to confirm the selection.

5. Start pacing.

Press the [Start

[Start Pacing]
Pacing] soft key to start pacing. The message ““Pacing
Pacing”” appears in the pacer information area.

6. Verify that white pacing markers appear on tthe

he EC
ECG
Gwwaveform.
aveform.

7. Adjust pacer
pacer output: increase pace
pacerr output until cardiac capture oc
occurs
curs (captur
(capture
e is indicated
indicated by tthe
he appearance of a
QRS complex after each pacing marker), and then decrease the output to the lowest level that still maintains
capture.

8. Verify the presence of a peripheral pulse.

 10-5

You can temporarily withhold pacing pulse and observe the patient’s underlying rhythm by pressing and holding the
[4:1]
4:1] soft key. This causes pacing pulse to be delivered at 1/4 of the defined pacer rate. To resume pacing at set rate,
release this key.

To stop pacing,
pacing, press the [[Stop Pacing] soft key.
Stop Pacing]

WARNING
 Use care when handling the multifunction electrode pads on the patient to avoid shock hazard during
pacing.

 If you are using the pacing function with battery power and the Low Battery alarm is presented, connect
the equipment to external power or install a fully charged battery.

CAUTION
 The monitoring or pacing function may be unstable in the presence of ESU or other electronic devices.
 10-6

11 Monitoring Resp
11.1 Overview
Impedance respiration
respiration is measured across the thorax. When the patient is breathing or ventilated, the volume of air
changes in the lungs, resulting in impedance changes between the electrodes. Respiration rate (RR) is calculated from
these impedance changes, and a respiration waveform appears on the equipment screen.

11.2 Safety

WARNING
 When monitoring the patient’s respiration, do not use ESU-proof ECG cables.

 The respiration measurement does not recognize obstructive and mixed apneas: it only indicates an alarm
when a pre-adjusted time had elapsed since the last detected breath. The safety and effectiveness of the
respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea, especially the apnea of prematurity and
apnea of infancy, has not been established.

11.3 Resp View

RR unit

RR alarm
high limit
RR reading
RR alarm
low limit
 11-1

11.4 Placing Resp Electrodes

As the skin is a poor conductor of electricity, preparing the skin is necessary for a good Respiration signal. Y
You
ou can refer
to the ECG section for how to prepare the skin.

As the Respiration measurement adopts the standard ECG electrode placement, you can use different ECG cables (3-lead,

5-lead, or 12-lead). Since the respiration signal is measure

measured
d between two ECG electrodes, if a standard ECG electrode
placement is applied, the two electrodes should be RA and LA of ECG Lead I, or RA and LL of ECG Lead II.

NOTE
 To optimize the respiration waveform, place the RA and LA electrodes horizontally when monitoring
respiration with ECG Lead I; place the RA and LL electrodes diagonally when monitoring respiration with
ECG Lead II.

Lead I Lead II
 11-2

11.4.1 Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp

If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize the placement of the two
electrodes between which Resp will be measured
measured.. Repositioning ECG electrodes from standard positions results in
changes in the ECG wavefor
waveform
m and may influence ST and arrhythmia interpr
interpretation.
etation.

 Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp electrodes pick
up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrodes
electrodes placement can help to reduce
cardiac overlay. Avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory electr
electrodes.
odes.
This is particularly important for neonates.

 Some patients with restricted movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may need to place the
left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion to optimize the respiratory
wave.

 In clinical applications, some patients (especially neonates) expand their chests laterally, causing a negative
intrathoracic pressure.
pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two respiration electrodes in the right midaxillary
and the left lateral chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of the breathing movement to optimize the
respiratory waveform.

NOTE
 Respiration monitoring is not for use on the patients
p atients who are very active, as this will cause false alarms.

11.4.2 Changing Resp Wave Settings

In the [Resp
[Resp Setup]
Setup] menu, you can:

 Select [Gain
[Gain]] and then choose an appropriate setting. The bigger the gain is, the larger the wave amplitude is.

 Select [Sweep
[Sweep]] and then choose an appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

 Select [Lead
[Lead]] to set lead for RESP monitoring.

In the [Resp
[Resp Setup]
Setup] menu, you can also change the [Apnea Alarm Delay]
Delay] as desired.
 11-3

FOR YOUR NOTES

 11-4

12 Monitoring PR
12.1 Overview
The pulse numeric
numeric counts tthe
he arterial pulsations th
that
at result fr
from
om the me
mechanical
chanical activity of the heart. You
You can display a
pulse from SpO2 or any arterial pressure. The displayed pulse numeric is color-coded to match its source.

PR unit

PR alarm high limit PR value

PR alarm low limit

12.2 Entering the PR Setup

You can enter the [PR
[PR Setup]
Setup] menu by selecting the PR parameter area.

12.3 Setting the PR Source

The color of PR parame
parameters
ters is consiste
consistent
nt with the P
PR
R source
source.. The e
equipment
quipment monitors
monitors the pulse
pulse rate derived
derived from
from the
current PR source and, if you select PR as alarm source, gives an alarm when PR limit is violated.

To set PR sourc
source,
e,

1. Select the PR parameter area to enter the [PR Setup]

Setup] menu.
2. Select [PR Source]
Source] and then select a label from the popup list.

The default PR source is S

SpO
pO2.

12.4 Adjusting Pulse Tone Volume

When PR alarm is switched on, the equipment gives out pulse tone.. You
You can change the volume of pulse tone by
adjusting [QRS
[QRS Volume]
Volume] in the [PR
[PR Setup]
Setup] menu. When a valid SpO 2 value exists, the system will adjust the pitch of
pulse tone according to the SpO2 value.
 12-1

FOR YOUR NOTES

 12-2

13 Monitoring SpO 2

13.1 Introduction
SpO2 monitoring is a non-invasive technique used to measure the amount of oxygenated haemoglobin and pulse rate
by measuring the absorption of selected wavelengths of light. The light generated in the probe passes through the
tissue and is converted into electrical signals by the photodetector in the probe. The SpO2 module processes the
electrical signal and displays a waveform and digital values for SpO 2 and pulse rate.

This device is calibrated

calibrated to display functional o
oxygen
xygen satu
saturation.
ration. It pro
provides
vides the follow
following
ing measurements.
measurements.

5 6

1. Pleth wave: visual indicat

indication
ion of patient’s pulse. The waveform is not normalized.

2. SpO2 unit

3. SpO2 alarm high limit

4. SpO2 alarm low limit

5. Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2): percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of
oxyhemoglobin
oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhem
deoxyhemoglobin.
oglobin.

6. Perfusion indicator: tthe

he pulsatile portion of the me
measured
asured sig
signal
nal caused by arterial
arterial pulsation.
 13-1

13.2 Safety

WARNING
 Use only SpO2 sensors specified in this manual. Follow the SpO2 sensor’s instructions for use and adhere to
all warnings and cautions.

 When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is indicated, blood samples should be analyzed by a
laboratory co-oximeter to completely understand the patient’s condition.

 Do not use SpO 2 sensors during magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Induced current could potentially
cause burns.

 Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin characteristics,
such as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. Inspect the sensor site every two hours and move the
sensor if the skin quality changes. Change the application site every four hours. For neonates or patients
with poor peripheral blood circulation or sensitive skin, inspect the sensor site more frequently.

13.3 Identifying SpO2 Modules

The equipment
equipment can be cconfigured
onfigured w
with
ith any of th
the
e following S
SpO
pO2 modules.

 Mindray SpO2 module;

 Masimo SpO2 module;

 Nellcor SpO2 module.

For Masimo or Nellcor SpO2 modules, you will see corresponding logo on the equipment.

13.4 SpO2 Monitoring Procedure

1. Select an appropriate
appropriate sensor according to the module type, patie
patient
nt categ
category
ory and weight.

2. Clean tthe
he application
application site, e.g. rremoving
emoving colored nail polish from the application
application site.
site.

3. Apply the sensor to the patient.

4. Select an appropriate ad
adapter
apter cable according to the connect
connector
or type and connect it with tthe
he equipm
equipment.
ent.

5. Connect the sensor cable to the adapter cable.

6. Switch the Mode Select knob to Monitor.

NOTE
 The SpO2 simulator can be used to check if the SpO2 sensor works properly. However, it cannot be used to
verify the accuracy of the SpO2 sensor.
 13-2

13.5 Changing SpO2 Settings

You can access the [SpO2
[SpO2 Setup]
Setup] menu by selecting the SpO2 parameter area

13.5.1 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity

For Mindray SpO2 module, you can set [Sensitivity
[Sensitivity]] to [High
[High],
], [[Med
Med]] or [Low
[Low]] from the [SpO2
[SpO2 Setup]
Setup] menu. For Masimo
SpO2 module, you can set [Sensitivity
[Sensitivity]] to [Normal
[Normal]] or [High
[High],
], in which [Normal
[Normal]] is equivalent to [Med
[Med].
].

 When the [Sensitivity

[Sensitivity]] is set to [High
[ High],
], the equipment is more sensitive to the changes to SpO2 values, but the
measurement
measurement accuracy is relatively low. When monitoring critically ill patients whose pulsations are very weak, it
is strongly recommended
recommended that the sensitivity is set to [[High].
High].

 When the [Sensitivity

[Sensitivity]] is set to [Low
[Low],
], the equipment responds slowly to the changes of SpO 2 value, but the
measurement
measurement accuracy is relatively high.

13.5.2 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the Same Limb

When monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb simultaneously, you can switch [ NIBP Simul]
Simul] on from the [SpO2
[SpO2
Setup]] menu to lock the SpO2 alarm status until the NIBP measurement
Setup measurement ends. If you switch [[NIBP Simul] off, low
NIBP Simul]

perfusion caused by NIBP measuremen

measurementt may lead to inaccurate SpO2 readings and therefore cause false physiological
alarms.

13.5.3 Changing Averaging Time

The SpO2 value displayed on the screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter the averaging
time is, the quicker the equipment responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level, but the measurement
accuracy is relatively low. Contrarily, the longer the averaging time is, the slower the patient monitor responds to
changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level, but the measurement accuracy will be improved. When monitoring
critically ill patients, selecting shorter averaging time will help understanding the patient’s condition.

To set the ave

averaging
raging tim
time:
e:

 For Mindray SpO2 module, set [Sensitivity

[Sensitivity]] to [High
[High],
], [[Med
Med]] or [Low
[Low]] from the [SpO2
[SpO2 Setup]
Setup] menu, which
respectively correspond
correspond to 7 s, 9 s and 11 s.

 For Masimo SpO2 module, set [Averaging

[Averaging]] to [2-4
[2-4 s],
s], [[4-6 s], [[8
4-6 s], ], [[10
8 ss], s], [[12
10 s], s], [[14
12 s], s] or [16
14 s] [16 s]
s] in the [SpO2
[ SpO2 Setup]
Setup]
menu.

13.5.4 Sat-Seconds Alarm Management

With traditional alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen saturation. During
monitoring, as soon as an alarm limit is violated, an audible alarm immediately sounds. When the patient’s
patient’s SpO2 value
fluctuates near an alarm limit, the alarm sounds each time the limit is violated. Such frequent alarm can be distracting.
 13-3

The Sat-Seconds
Sat-Seconds featur
feature
e is available w
with
ith the Nellcor SpO2 module to decrease the likelihood of false alarms caused by
motion artifacts. The Sat-Seconds limit controls the amount of time that SpO2 saturation may be outside the set limits
before an alarm sounds. The method of calculation is as follows: the number of percentage points that the SpO2
saturation falls outside the alarm limit is multiplied by the number of seconds that it remains outside the limit. This can
be stated as the equation: Sat-Seconds= Points × Seconds

Only when the Sat-Seconds limit is reached, the monitor gives a Sat-Seconds alarm. The figure below demonstrates the
alarm response time with a Sat-Seconds limit set at 50 and a low SpO 2 limit set at 90%. In this example, the patient’s
SpO2 drops to 88% (2 points) and remains there for 2 seconds. Then it drops to 86% (4 points) for 3 seconds, and then to
84% (6 points) for 6 seconds. The resulting Sat-Seconds are:
Points Seconds Sat-Seconds
2× 2= 4
4× 3= 12
6× 6= 36
Total
Total Sat-Seconds = 52

After approximately
approximately 10.9 seconds, a Sat-Second alarm would sound, because the limit of 50 Sat-Seconds would have
been exceeded.

SpO2%

Seconds
Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than remaining steady for a period of several seconds. Normally, the patient’s SpO2
may fluctuate above and below an alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm range several times. During such fluctuation,
the system sums the number of SpO 2 points, both positive and negative, until either the Sat-Seconds limit is reached, or
the patient’s SpO2 re-enters the non-alarm range and remains there.

13.5.5 Changing the Speed of the Pleth Wave

In the [SpO2 Setup] menu, select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the
wider the wave is.
 13-4

13.6 SpO2 Desat Alarm

The defibrillator/monitor
defibrillator/monitor pr
provides
ovides an SpO2 Desat alarm. The SpO2 Desat alarm provides an additional limit setting below
the SpO2 low limit setting to notify you of potentially life threatening decreases in oxygen saturation. The SpO2 Desat
alarm is a high-level exclusive alarm. Y
You
ou cannot change its alarm level.

Yo
You
u can Press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select [[Alarm >>]→ [Para. Alarm >>]
Alarm Setup >>] >>]→
[Desat], or select a parameter windo
Desat], window
w and then select [[Para. >>]→ [Desat
Para. Alarm >>] Desat]] to set the Desat alarm.

NOTE
 In the case that the SpO2 low limit alarm value is set below the Desat limit, the the SpO2 low limit is
automatically adjusted to the Desat value.

13.7 Pitch Tone

The pitch tone function enables tthe
he equipme
equipment
nt to give variable pitches o
off heartbeat tone or pulse tone
tone as the patient’s
patient’s
SpO2 level changes. This equipment provides
provides 22 levels of pitch tone. The pitch of heartbeat tone or pulse tone rises as
SpO2 level increases and falls as SpO2 level decreases.

There are
are two pitch to
tone
ne modes
modes.. The se
select
lect pitch tone m
mode,
ode, select [[SpO2 Setup]
SpO2 Setup] → [Pitch Tone]
Tone] from the Configuration
Main menu and toggle between [Mode
[Mode 1]
1] and [Mode
[Mode 2].
2].

If the SpO2 is disabled, the pitch tone function will be disabled also.

13.8 Measurement Limitations

If you doubt the SpO 2 readings, check the patient’s vital signs first. Then check the equipment and SpO2 sensor. The
following factors may influence the accuracy of measurem
measurement:
ent:

 Ambient light
 Patient movement (active and imposed motion)

 Diagnostic testing

 Low perfusion

 Electromagnetic
Electromagnetic interference, such as MRI environment

 Electrosurgical
Electrosurgical units

 Dysfunctional haemoglobin, such as carboxyhemoglobin (COHb)and methemoglobin (MetHb)

 Presence of certain dyes, such as methylene and indigo carmine

 Inappropriate positioning of the SpO2 sensor, or use of incorrect SpO2

 Drop of arterial blood flow to immeaurable level caused by shock, anemia, low temperatur
temperature
e or vasoconstrictor.
 13-5

13.9 Masimo Information

 Masimo Patents

This device may

may be cov
covered
ered b
byy one or m
more
ore of the following U
US
S patents and foreign e
equivalents:
quivalents: 5,758,644, 6,011,986,
6,699,194, 7,215,986, 7,254,433, 7,530,955.

 No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized
unauthorized sensors or cables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or
more of the patents relating to this device.

13.10 Nellcor Information

 Nellcor Patents

This device may

may be cov
covered
ered b
byy one or m
more
ore of the following U
US
S patents and foreign e
equivalents:
quivalents: 5,485,847, 5,676,141,
5,743,263, 6,035,223, 6,226,539, 6,411,833, 6,463,310, 6,591,123, 6,708,049, 7,016,715, 7,039,538, 7,120,479, 7,120,480,
7,142,142, 7,162,288, 7,190,985, 7,194,293, 7,209,774, 7,212,847, 7,400,919.

 No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized
unauthorize d replacement parts which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or
more of the patents relating to this device.
 13-6

14 NIBP
14.1 Introduction
Automatic non-invasive
non-invasive blood pressure monitoring uses the oscillometric method of measurement.
measurement. It is intended for
adult, pediatric and neonatal patients. To understand how this method works, we’ll compare it to the auscultative
method.

With auscultation, the clinician listens to the blood pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures. The
mean pressure can then be calculated with reference
reference to these pressures as long as the arterial pressure curve is normal.

Since the equipment cannot hear the blood pressure, it measures cuff pressure oscillation amplitudes. Oscillations are
caused by blood pressure pulses against the cuff. The oscillation with the greatest amplitude is the mean pressure. Once
the mean pressure is determined, the systolic and diastolic pressures are calculated with reference to the mean.

Simply stated, auscultation measures systolic and diastolic pressures and the mean pressure is calculated. The
oscillometric method measures the mean pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures.

As specified in IEC 60601-2-30/EN60601-2-30, NIBP monitoring is allowed while an electrosurgical opera

operation
tion is in
progress
progress or a defibrillation shock is being delivered.

NIBP diagnostic significance must be decided by the doctor who performs the measurement.

14.2 Safety

WARNING
 Be sure to select the correct patient category setting for your patient before measurement. Do not apply
the higher adult settings for pediatric or neonatal patients. Otherwise it may present a safety hazard.

 Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin damage has occurred
or is expected.

 Use clinical judgment to determine whether to perform frequent unattended blood pressure
measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of hematoma in the
limb fitted with the cuff.

 Do not use the NIBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial catheter in place. This could
cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff inflation.

 If you doubt the NIBP readings, determines the patient’s vital signs by alternative means and then verify
that the equipment is working correctly.
 14-1

14.3 Measurement Limitations

Measurements
Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 240 bpm, or if the patient is
on a heart-lung machine.

The measurement
measurement ma
mayy be inaccur
inaccurate
ate or impo
impossible,
ssible,

 If a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect;

 With excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions;

 With cardiac arrhythmias;

 Rapid blood pressure changes;

 Severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries;

 Obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the artery.

14.4 Measurement Modes

There are
are three m
modes
odes of me
measuring
asuring NIBP:

 Manual: measurement on demand.

 Auto: continually repeated measurements

measurements at set intervals.

 STAT: continually rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then return to the previous mode.

14.5 Measuring Procedure

14.5.1 Preparing for NIBP Measurement
1. Verify that th
the
e patien
patientt category
category is correct.
correct. C
Change
hange it if nece
necessary.
ssary.

2 Plug the air tubing into the equipment’s NIBP connector.

3. Select a cor
correct
rect sized ccuff
uff by refer
referring
ring to the limb circumfe
circumference
rence mar
marked
ked on the cuff. The width of the
the cuff should
be 40% (50% for neonates) of the limb circumference
circumference,, or 2/3 of the upper arm’s length. The inflatable part of the
cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 50% to 80% of the limb.

4. Apply the cuff to an upper ar

arm
m or thigh o
off the patient a
and
nd make sure the Φ marking on the cuff m
matches
atches the artery
artery
location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of the
extremities.
extremities. Make sure that the cuff edge falls within the marked range. If it does not, use a cuff that fits better.

5. Connect the cuff to tthe

he air tub
tubing
ing and m
make
ake sure that the bladder insid
inside
e the ccover
over is not folded and twisted.

6. Switch the Mode Select knob to Monitor.

14.5.2 Starting and Stopping NIBP Measurements

You can start and stop NIBP measurements by using the hardkey on the equipment
equipment’s
’s front panel.
 14-2

14.5.3 Correcting the Measurement

The cuffed limb
limb should be a
att the same le
level
vel as the pa
patient’
tient’ss heart. If not, corr
correct
ect the measurement
measurement by:
by:

 Add 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimeter higher,

higher, or

 Deduct 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimeter lower.

14.5.4 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling

1. Select the NIBP parameter area to access the [NIBP Setup]
Setup] menu.

2. Select [Interval
Interval]] and then select a desired time interval. Selecting [Manual
[Manual]] switches to manual mode.

3. Start the measureme

measurement
nt manually. The equipm
equipment
ent will the
then
n automatic
automatically
ally repeat NIBP measu
measurements
rements at the set time
interval.

Warning
 Continuous non-invasive blood
blood pressure measurements may cause purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in
the limb with the cuff. Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the

extremity of the cuffed limb for

f or normal color, warmth and sensitivity. If any abnormity occurs, move the
cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements immediately.

14.5.5 Starting a STAT Measurement

1. Select the NIBP parameter area to access the [NIBP Setup]
Setup] menu.

2. Select [NIBP STAT].

STAT]. The STAT mode
mode initiates a 5-m
5-minute
inute continuous, automatic NIBP measurement.
measurement.

14.6 Understanding the NIBP Numerics

The NIBP display shows num

numerics
erics only as below
below.. Your
Your display may be co
configured
nfigured to look slightly diff
different.
erent.

1 2

3 7

4
8
5

6
 14-3

1. Measurement mode

2. Pressure unit: mmHg or kPa

3. NIBP alarm high limit

4. NIBP alarm low limit

5. Time of last measureme

measurement
nt

6. Systolic pressure

7. Diastolic pressure

8. Mean pressure at the completion of measurement, or cuff pressure during the measurement

14.7 Setting Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure

You can set the initial cuff inflation pressure manually. In the [NIBP
[NIBP Setup]
Setup] menu, select [Initial
[ Initial Pressure]
Pressure] and then
select the appropriate setting. The cuff is inflated accordingly
accordingly at the next NIBP measurement.
measurement.

The table below

below list the set
setting
ting range o
off initial cuff inflatio
inflation
n pressure:

Patient category Range (mmHg) Default (mmHg) Accuracy (mmHg)

Adult 80 to 280 160 10
Pediatric 80 to 210 140
Neonate 60 to 140 90

NOTE
 Setting initial cuff inflation pressure is disabled during NIBP measurement.

 The initial cuff inflation pressure is restored to the default setting if NIBP module has been reset or patient
category has been changed.

14.8 Setting Pressure Unit

To set pressure
pressure unit, acce
access
ss configuratio
configuration
n managemen
management.
t. In the Config
Configuration-Main
uration-Main me
menu,
nu, select [[NIBP Setup]
NIBP Setup] → [Press.
Unit]] and toggle between [mmHg
Unit [mmHg]] and [kPa
[kPa].
].
You can change NIBP unit only through configuration management.
 14-4

15 Temp
15.1 Introduction
This equipment
equipment allows you to simultaneo
simultaneously
usly monitor two tempe
temperature
rature ssites.
ites.

15.2 Understanding the Temp Display

5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9

1. Temp alarm high limit

2. Temperature
Temperature at site 1

3. Temp alarm low limit

4. Temperature
Temperature at site 2

5. Temperature
Temperature unit

6. Temperature
Temperature difference

7. The value of T1

8. The value of TD

9. The value of T2
 15-1

15.3 Making a Temp Measurement

1. Select an appropriate Temp probe for your patient.

2. If you are using a disposable probe, co

connect
nnect the probe to the tem
temperature
perature cable.

3 Plug the probe or temperature

temperature cable to the Temp connector.

4. Attach the probe to the patient properly.

5. Check that tthe
he ala
alarm
rm settings are appropriate for this p
patient.
atient.

6. Switch the Mode Select knob tto

o Mo
Monitor
nitor if the equipment has n
not
ot been turned on.

NOTE
 Verify that the probe detection program works correctly before Temp monitoring. If plug out the probe
cable from the T1 or T2 connector, the equipment shall give an alarm and display corresponding message
correctly.

15.4 Setting the Temperature Unit

To set temperature
temperature unit, enter the Configurat
Configuration
ion Main menu, se
select
lect [[Temp Setup]
Temp Setup] → [Temp Unit]
Unit] and toggle between
[ºC]
ºC] and [ºF
[ºF].
]. You can change Temp unit only through configuration management.
 15-2

16 Monitoring IBP
16.1 Introduction
The equipment
equipment can moni
monitor
tor two inv
invasive
asive blood pr
pressures
essures and dis
displays
plays the sys
systolic,
tolic, diastolic and mean pre
pressures
ssures and a
waveform for each pressure.

16.2 Safety

WARNING

 Use only pressure transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable pressure transducers.

 Make sure that the applied parts never contact other conductive parts.

 To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the equipment’s
cables and transducers never come into contact with the high-frequency surgical units.

 When accessories are used, make sure the operation environment meets the requirements for accessory’s
operation temperature specified by the instructions for use.

16.3 Zeroing IBP Transducer

To avoid inaccu
inaccurate
rate pressu
pressure
re reading
readings,
s, IBP transdu
transducer
cer shall be zeroed in accordance
accordance with yo
your
ur hospital’
hospital’ss policy (at least
once per day). Zero the transducer whenever:

 A new transducer or adapter cable is used.

 You reconnect the transducer cable to the equipment.

 The equipment
equipment restarts.

 You doubt the readings.

To zero the transducer:

1 Turn off the stopcock to the patient.

2. Vent the
the transdu
transducer
cer to atmospheric pressure by turning on the stopcock tto
o the air.

3. Select an IBP param

parameter
eter wind
window
ow to e
enter
nter the setup menu for the pressure (e.g.
(e.g. Art), select [Art
[Art Zero>>]
Zero>>] → [Zero].
Zero].
During zero calibration, the [Zero
[Zero]] button is inactive. It is reactivated after the zero calibration is completed.

4. After the completion of zero calibration, close the stopcoc

stopcockk to the air and open
open the sto
stopcock
pcock to the patient.
 16-1

Pressure transducer

3-way stopcock

Adapter cable

Defibrillator
/monitor

16.4 Making an IBP Measurement

1. Plug the transducer cable into the IBP connector.

2. Prepare the flush solution.

3. Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transd
transducer
ucer and stopcocks are free of air bubbles.

NOTE
 If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air bubble
may lead to wrong pressure reading.

4. Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.

5. Position the transducer so that it is level wit

with
h the hear
heart,
t, approximat
approximately
ely at the level of the m
midaxillary
idaxillary line.

6. Select appropriate IBP label.

7. Zero the transducer. After a su

successful
ccessful ze
zeroing,
roing, turn off the sstopcock
topcock to the atmospheric
atmospheric pressure and turn on the
stopcock to the patient.

8. Switch the Mode Select knob to Monitor.

 16-2

Heparinized
fluid bag
Pressure
transducer

Valve

Stopcock
Adapter cable for pressure
Flushing set
transducer

Pressure line

Defibrillator
/monitor

NOTE
 If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP) for a sitting patient, level the transducer with the top of the
patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect reading.

16.5 Understanding the IBP Display

The IBP measurement
measurement is displayed as a waveform and numeric pressures
pressures.. For different
different pressures, this
this display may be
slightly different.

1 2 3 4 5
1. IBP waveform

2. Systolic pressure

3. Diastolic pressure

4. Mean pressure

5. Pressure unit

For some pressures, the parameter window may show the mean pressure only. For different pressures, their default unit
may be different. If the Art/Ao and ICP are measured simultaneously, the parameter window of the ICP display will show
CPP reading, which is obtained by subtracting ICP from the Art/Ao mean pressure.
 16-3

16.6 Changing IBP Settings

16.6.1 Changing a Pressure for Monitoring
1. Select the IBP parameter area to access the [IBP Setup]
Setup] menu.

2. Select [Label
Label]] and then select your desired label from the list. The already displayed labels cannot be selected.

Label Description Label Description

PA Pulmonary arter
artery
y pressure CVP Central venous pressure
Ao Aortic pressure LAP Left atrial pressure
UAP Umbilical arterial pressure RAP Right atrial pressure
BAP Brachial arterial pressure ICP Intracranial pressure
FAP Femoral artery pressure UVP Umbilical venous pressure
ART Arterial blood pressure P1, P2 Non-specific pressure label

16.6.2 Changing IBP Wave Settings

In the IBP Setup menu, you can:

 Select [Sweep
[Sweep]] and then choose an appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

 Change the size of the pressure’s waveform by adjusting [Upper

[ Upper Scale],
Scale], [[Middle Scale] or [Lower
Middle Scale] [Lower Scale].
Scale].

16.6.3 Setting Pressure Unit

To set pressure
pressure unit, acce
access
ss configuratio
configuration
n managemen
management.
t. In the Config
Configuration
uration Main m
menu,
enu, select [[IBP Setup] and set
IBP Setup]
[Press. Unit]
Unit] to [mmHg
[mmHg],
], [[cmH2O
cmH2O]] and [kPa
[kPa].
].

You can change pressure unit only through configuration management.

16.6.4 Setting IBP Filter

To set IBP filter,
filter, access config
configuration
uration manag
management.
ement. In tthe
he Configur
Configuration
ation Main menu, select [[IBP Setup] and set [Filter
IBP Setup] [Filter]] to
[8 Hz],
Hz], [[12.5 Hz]] and [20
12.5 Hz [20 Hz].
Hz]. The default setting is 8 Hz.
 16-4

17 Monitoring Carbon CO 2

17.1 Introduction
CO2 monitoring is a continuous, non-invasive technique for determining the concentration of CO2 in the patient’s airway
by measuring the absorption of infrared (IR) light of specific wavelengt
wavelengths.
hs. The CO2 has its own absorption characteristic
and the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the measured CO 2. When a specific
band of IR light is passed through respiratory gas samples, some of IR light will b
bee absorbed by the CO2 molecules. The
amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed through the respirat
respiratory
ory gas sample is measured with a
photodetector. From the amount of IR light measured, the concentration of CO 2 is calculated.

The equipment
equipment monitors the patient’s CO2 using either a sidestream or a microstream CO 2 module.

CO2 measurement provides:

1. A CO2 waveform.

2. End tidal CO2 value (EtCO2): the CO2 value measured at the end of the expiration phase.
3. Fraction of inspired CO2 (FiCO2): the smallest CO2 value measured during inspiration.

4. Airway respiration rate (a

(awRR):
wRR): the number of breaths
breaths per minute, calcu
calculated
lated from the CO2 waveform.

17.2 Safety

CAUTION
 The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sampling line and therefore prevents them from
entering the module. If the collected water reaches to a certain amount, you should drain it to avoid
blocking the airway.

 The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module. After a
long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even block the
airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. Replacing the watertrap once a month is recommended.

 Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could rresult.
esult.

NOTE

 To extend the lifetime of the watertrap and module, disconnect the watertrap and set the operating mode
to Standby when CO2 monitoring is not required.
 17-1

17.3 Preparing for CO2 Measurement

17.3.1 Using a Sidestream CO2 Module
For sidestream CO2 module, the default operating mode is Measure. When the equipment enters the Monitor mode, the
CO2 module starts warming up and enters the full accuracy mode after the completion of warmup.

1. Attach the w
watertrap
atertrap to the module and tthen
hen cconnect
onnect the CO2 components as shown below.

Watertrap fixer

Watertrap Sampling line

2. The module starts up. Aft

After
er start-up is finishe
finished,
d, the message “CO2 Warming Up”
Up” is displayed. Now, the module is in
Iso accuracy mode. You can take measurement now, but the accuracy is relatively low.

3. After the module ffinishes

inishes warmup, it enters the full acc
accuracy
uracy mo
mode,
de, and yo
you
u can take measurem
measurement.
ent.

17.3.2 Using a Microstream CO2 Module

For microstream CO2 module, the default operating mode is Measure. When the equipment enters the Monitor mode,
the CO2 module starts warming up and enters the full accuracy mode after the completion of warmup
warmup..

1. Connect the sam

sampling
pling line to the module and the
then
n conne
connect
ct the CO2 components as shown below.

Sampling line connector

Sampling line
 17-2

2. After the module finishes warmup, you can take CO2 measurement. During module warmup, the message “CO2
“CO2
Up” is displayed.
Warming Up”

17.4 Changing CO2 Settings

17.4.1 Accessing CO2 Setup Menu

By selecting the CO2 parameter window, you can access the [CO2
[ CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu.

17.4.2 Changing Operating Mode

To change opera
operating
ting mode
mode,, enter the [CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu and select the desired mode. The operating mode will be
saved when the equipment is powered off.

 Only in the Measure mode can you start the CO 2 module.

 In the standby mode, the gas intake pump, infrared light source, etc. are automatically switched off to reduce
power consumption and extend the lifetime of the CO2 module.

17.4.3 Selecting Gas Compensations

WARNING

 Make sure that the appropriate compensations are used. Inappropriate compensations may cause
inaccurate measurement values and result in misdiagnosis.

For sidestream CO2 module:

1. Enter the [CO2 Setup]

Setup] menu and then select [Others
[Others >>].
>>].

2. Respectively select:

 [O2 Compen]: 0 to 100%

 [N2O Compen]: 0 to 100%

 [Des Compen]: 0 to 24%

The sum of the three com

compensations
pensations should no
nott be greater
greater than 100%.

For microstream CO2 module, gas compensations are not required.

 17-3

17.4.4 Setting Humidity Compensation

Sidestream and microstream CO2 modules are configured to compensate CO 2 reading for either Body Temperature and
Pressure Saturated (BTPS) gas, to account for humidity in the patient’s breath, or Ambient Temperature and Pressure Dry
(ATPD) gas.

ATPD: Pco 2 (mmHg) = CO2 (vol%) × Pamb / 100

BTPS: PCO 2 ( mmHg ) = CO2 (vol %) × ( Pamb − 47) / 100

pressure; vol % = CO2 concentra

Where, PCO 2 = partial pressure; tion; Pamb = ambient pressure, the unit is mmHg.
concentration;

You can set the humidity compensation on or off according to the actual condition. To set the humidity compensation:

1. Enter the [CO2 Setup]

Setup] menu and then select [Others
[Others >>]
>>] → [Humidity Compen].
Compen].

2. Select either [On

On]] for BTPS or [Off
[Off] for ATPD.

17.4.5 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking

The values of
of EtCO2 and FiCO2 refresh in real time. For the microstream CO 2 module, you can select a time interval for
picking the highest CO2 as the EtCO2 and the lowest as the FiCO 2.

1. Enter the [CO2 Setup]

Setup] menu and then select [Others
[Others >>].
>>].

2. Set [Max Hold]

Hold] to:

 [Single Breath]:
Breath]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated for every breath.

 [10 s],
s], [20
[20 s]
s] or [30
[30 s]:
s]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated using 10, 20 or 30 seconds of data.

17.4.6 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay

In the [CO2
[CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu, you can adjust [Apnea
[Apnea Time].
Time]. The equipment gives
gives an apnea alarm if the patient has stopped
breathing for longer than the preset apnea time.

17.4.7 Changing CO2 Wave Settings

Select the CO2 parameter area to access the [CO2
[ CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu.

 Select [Sweep
[Sweep]] and then choose an appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

 Select [Scale
[Scale]] and adjust the upper scale to change the amplitude of CO2 waveform.

 Select [Others
[Others >>]
>>] → [Wave Type]
Type] and toggle between [Draw
[Draw]] and [Fill]:
[Fill]:

 [Draw]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a curved line.

Draw]:

 [Fill]:
Fill]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a filled area.

17.4.8 Setting the Auto Standby Time

For the microstream CO2 module, you can set a period of time after which the CO2 module enters the standby mode
automatically if no breath is detected since the last detected breath.
 17-4

To set auto standb

standbyy time, se
select
lect the CO2 parameter area to enter the [CO2
[ CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu, and then select [Others
[ Others
>>]
>>] → [Auto Standby].
Standby].

17.4.9 Setting Pressure Unit

Press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select [Others
[ Others >>]
>>] → [[Configuration >>]
Configuration >>] → en
ente
terr the
the re
requ
quir
ired
ed
password. In the Configuration Management–Main menu, select [CO2
[CO2 Setup]
Setup] and set [Press.
[Press. Unit]
Unit] to [mmHg
[mmHg],
], [[%
%] or
[kPa].
kPa].

17.5 Barometric Pressure Compensation

Both sidestream and microstream CO2 modules have the function of automatic barometric pressure compensation.
compensation. That
is to say, the system automatically measures the barometric pressure which the equipment is exposed to.

17.6 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may in
influence
fluence the ac
accuracy
curacy of me
measuremen
asurement:
t:

 Leakage or internal venting of sampled gas

 Mechanical shock

 Cyclic pressure higher than 10 kPa (100 cmH2O) or abnormal change to airway pressure

 Other sources of interference, if any.

17.7 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System

When the sampling system of the sidestream CO2 module works incorrectly,
incorrectly, check if the sampling line is kinked. If not,
remove it from the watertrap. If the equipment gives a message indicating the airway still works incorrectly, it indicates
that the watertrap must have been blocked, and you should replace with a new one. Otherwise, you can determine that
the sampling line must have been blocked. Replace with a new sampling line.

17.8 Removing the Exhaust Gases from the System

WARNING

 When using the Sidestream or Microstream CO 2 measurement on patients who are receiving or have
recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia

machine/ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

 To remove the sample gas
gas to a scave
scavenging
nging system, connect an e
exhaust
xhaust tube to the gas outlet
outlet connector o
off the module.
module.

17-5

17.9 Zeroing the Transducer

The zero
zero calibration eliminates
eliminates the eff
effect
ect of baseline d
drift
rift during CO2 measurement exerted on the readings and
therefore
therefore maintains the accuracy of the CO 2 measurements.

A zero calibration is carried out automatically when necessary. You

You can also start a manual zero calibration if necessary.
To manually start a zero
zero calibration
calibration,, select [[Zero
Zero]] in the [CO2
[CO2 Setup]
Setup] menu. Disconnecting the patient airway is not
required when performing a zero calibration.

17.10 Calibrating the Transducer

For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a calibration should be performed
per formed once a year or when the readings go
far beyond the range. For details, refer to the Chapter 25 Maintenance
Ma intenance and Testing
Testing.. .

17.11 Oridion Information

This trademark
trademark is regist
registered
ered in Isr
Israel,
ael, Japan, Germ
German
an and America
America..

Oridion Patents

The capnography
capnography compo
component
nent of this pr
product
oduct is cov
covered
ered by one or mor
more
e of the fo
following
llowing US patents:
patents: 6,428,483;
6,997,880; 6,437,316; 7,488,229; 7,726,954 and their foreign equivalents. Additional patent applications pending.

No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized CO2 sampling consumables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of
one or more of the patents relating to this device and/or CO 2 sampling consumable.
 17-6

18 Marking Events
During patient monitoring or therapy, some events may exert effects on the patient and as a result change related

waveforms and parameter values. To help analysing the waveforms or numerics at that time, you can mark these events.

Before marking an event, you can define events A to L, for example, define event D as injecting Atropine. You can only
define an event through configuration management. Event A is always [Generic
[Generic]] and cannot be changed.

To mark an eve
event,
nt,

1. In Monitor
Monitor m
mode,
ode, Manual De
Defib
fib mod
mode,
e, or Pacer mode, press tthe
he [Event
[Event]] button on the front panel to access the
[Mark Event]
Event] menu as shown below.

2. Select an event you want to mark from [A] to [L

[L], or select [Exit
[Exit]] to return to the main screen.

In AED mode, pressing the [Event

[ Event]] button directly marks Event A “Generic”.

When you mark an event, the event name and the time when the event is triggered will be displayed at the prompt
information area. This information
information disappears automatically after a period of 5 seconds.
 18-1

FOR YOUR NOTES

 18-2

19 Freezing Waveforms
During patient monitoring, the freeze feature allows you to freeze the currently displayed waveforms on the screen so

that you can have a close examination of the patient’s status. Besides, you can select any frozen waveform for recording.
Waveforms can be frozen only in the Monitor Mode.

19.1 Freezing Waveforms

In the Monitor mode, select the [Freeze
[ Freeze]] soft key, then all waveforms on the screen stop refreshing or scrolling and the
[Freeze
Freeze]] menu pops up, as shown below. The [Freeze] soft key changes to [ Unfreeze], while the parameter area remains
Unfreeze],
refreshing properly.

The equipment
equipment can free
freeze
ze the wa
waveforms
veforms for 120 seconds
seconds..

19.2 Reviewing Frozen Waveforms

When waveforms are frozen, you can view the waveforms by selecting the [Scroll
[ Scroll]] button and then rotating the
navigation knob clockwise or counter
counterclockwise
clockwise to move the frozen waveforms right or left.

At the lower right corner of the bottommost waveform, there is an upward arrow. The frozen time is displayed below the
arrow. With each step or click, the frozen time changes at intervals of 1 second. The time can be applied to all the
waveforms on the screen.
 19-1

19.3 Unfreezing Waveforms

To unfreeze the frozen
frozen wavef
waveforms,
orms, yo
you
u can either:

 Press the [Unfreeze

[Unfreeze]] soft key, or

 Select [Exit
[Exit]] to return to the Main screen, or

 Perform any other action that causes the screen to be readjusted or opens a menu, such as plugging in or out a
module, pressing the [Lead
[Lead Select]
Select] or [Main
[Main Menu]
Menu] button, etc.

19.4 Recording Frozen Waveforms

1. In the [Freeze
Freeze]] menu, set

 [Wave 1],
1], [Wave
[Wave 2]
2] and [Wave
[Wave 3]
3] if 50 mm recorder is configured. Or

 [Wave 1],
1], [Wave
[Wave 2],
2], [[Wave 3] and [Wave
Wave 3] [Wave 4]
4] if 80 mm recorder is configured.

2. Select the [Record

Record]] button. The selected waveforms and all numerics at the frozen time will be printed out by the
recorder.
 19-2

20 Review
20.1 Reviewing Events
The equipment
equipment can automa
automatically
tically reco
record
rd and save patient ev
events.
ents. You can review patient events
events following this
procedure:

To review ev
events,
ents, you ccan:
an:

 In the Monitor, Manual Defib or Pacer mode, press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select
[Review>>
Review>>]] [Review Events >>]
>>] to enter the [Review
[ Review Events]
Events] menu, or

 In the Monitor mode, repeatedly press the [Trends

[Trends]] soft key to enter the [Review
[Review Events]
Events] menu.

The following figure sh

shows
ows the Revie
Review
w Event
Eventss menu.

In the [Review
[Review Events]
Events] menu, you can

 Select [Event
[Event Type],
Type], and then select [Operator
[Operator Initiated], [Phys. Alarm], [Arrhythmia], [NIBP Meas.], [Tech.
Alarm] or [All
[All]] to review events as desired.

 Select [Prev/Next
[Prev/Next]] to page up/down to view more events.

 Select [Index
[Index]] to enter the [Index
[ Index]] menu. In this menu, you can set the time span in which the events happened.

 Select [Record
[Record]] to print out the current event list.

 Select [Previous
[Previous Menu]
Menu] to return to previous menu.

 Select [Exit
[Exit]] to return to the Main screen.
 20-1

Patient events will be saved as archived events when the equipment is turned off. In case of power failure, the saved
patient events will not be cleared or lost; they will be turned into archived events instead.

20.2 Reviewing Tabular Trends

In the Monitor, Manual Defib o Pacer mode, press the Main Menu button on the front panel; select
[Review>>
Review>>]] [Trends>>
Trends>>]] or, if you are operating in the Monitor mode, select the [Trends
[ Trends]] soft key to enter the tabular
trends menu, as shown below:

20.3 Reviewing 12-Lead Reports

If your equipment is configured with the 12-lead function, you can review the 12-lead report through the Review menu.

In the Monitor, Manual Defib or Pacer mode, press the Main Menu button on the front panel, and then select
[Review>>
Review>>]] [12-Lead Report>>]
Report>>] to enter the [12-Lead
[ 12-Lead Report]
Report] menu.

Refer to Section 7.5 12-Lead Reports for details.

 20-2

21 Data Management
21.1 Introduction
The data management
management functio
function
n enables you to:

 Edit patient information;

 Review patient events; and

 Export patient data to USB memory.

To access data m
management,
anagement, p
press
ress the Main Menu button on the front panel to enter the Main Menu, and then
then select
[Others>>
Others>>]] → [Archives>> ]. A prompt pops up as shown below:
Archives>>].

Select [Y
[Yes]
es] to enter the Archives Main screen as shown below

Only in Monitor, Manual Defib and Pacer mode can you access archive mode. When you enter the Archives Main screen,
patient monitoring and therapy automatically
automatically end and the patient last admitted will be saved as the latest archived
patient.
 21-1

21.2 Reviewing Patient Events

To view patient events,
events, sele
select
ct a patient in the Archives Main scr
screen,
een, and then p
press
ress the navigation
navigation knob to con
confirm
firm the
selection. In this case, you can select the [Return
[Return]] soft key to return to the Archives Main screen.

To edit patient information, se

select
lect the [[Patient Info] button and change the patient information as desired. Then you
Patient Info]
can select the [Review
[Review Events]
Events] button to return to the Review Events screen or the [Return
[ Return]] soft key to return to the
Archives Main screen.

21.3 Exporting Data

In the Archives Main screen,

1. Select [Export Data]

Data] to enter the Export Data screen, in which select [[USB Memory]. Then, the system starts
USB Memory].
searching for USB memory and enters the data export screen if the memory is found.

2. Select the data you want to export and th

then
en pr
press
ess tthe
he [[Export
Export]] button.

During data export, the message “Exporting Data. Please Wait...

Wait...”” appears in the prompt information area and a
progress
progress bar is displayed. If an exception happens, data export stops automatically and the reason for interruption is
presented in the prompt information area.

After the data is completely exported, you can select the [Return
[ Return]] soft key to return to the Archives Main screen.

NOTE

 Do not remove the USB flash memory from the equipment before data is completely exported.
 21-2

22 Recording
22.1 Using a Recorder
The thermal recorder
recorder records patient inform
information,
ation, measur
measurement
ement nume
numerics
rics and up to four waveforms.
waveforms.

The equipment
equipment can be config
configured
ured with 50 mm or 80 mm therm
thermal
al recor
recorder.
der.

22.2 Recording Types

By the way recordings are triggered, they can be classified into the following categories:

1. Manually-triggered
Manually-triggered realtime waveform recordings.

2. Event-triggered
Event-triggered recordings.

3. Alarm recordings triggere

triggered
d by an alar
alarm
m limit violation o
orr an arrhythmia event.

4. Manually-triggered,
Manually-triggered, task-related recordings.

The task-related
task-related rec
recordings
ordings include
include::

 Frozen wave recording

 Tabular trends recording

 Event recording

 Parameter alarm recording

 Event review recording

 Event Summary Report

 Check report

 Configuration recording

For details about alarm recording, refer to 5 Alarm.

Alarm.
For details about task-related recordings, refer to respective sections of this manual.

22.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings

To manually start a re
recording
cording,, you can eit
either
her

 Press the hardkey on the front of the recorder,

 Select the [Record

[Record]] button from the current menu or window.

At the completion of recording, two columns of “*” marks will be printed to indicate the end of recording.
 22-1

Automatic recordings will be triggered in the following conditions:

 If both [Alarm
[Alarm]] and [Alm
[Alm Rec]
Rec] for a measurement are switched on, an alarm recording will be triggered
automatically as an alarm occurs.

 When related event is triggered

triggered..

To manually stop a recordin

recording,
g, you can press the hardkey ag
again.
ain.

Recordingss stop automatically when:

Recording

 A recording is completed.

 The recorder
recorder runs out o
off paper.

 The recorder
recorder has a failure
failure..

 Operating mode is changed.

NOTE
 If you change the ECG Lead, Gain or Filter during recording, the recorded ECG waveform changes
accordingly, but the label of Lead, Gain or Filter recorded remains unchanged.

22.4 Setting the Recorder

22.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu
To access the [Record
[Record Setup]
Setup] menu, press the Main Menu button on the front panel and select [[Others>>
Others>>]] → [Record
>>].
Setup >>].

22.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording

Up to 3 waveforms can be recorded at a time if 50 mm recorder is configured. Up to 4 waveforms can be recorded at a
time if 80 mm recorder is configured. You can select, in turn, [Wave
[Wave 1],
1], [[Wave 2] and [Wave
Wave 2] [Wave 3]
3] in the [Record
[ Record Setup]
Setup]
menu, and then set the waveforms you want to record. You can also turn off a waveform recording by selecting [Off
[Off].
These settings
settings are inte
intended
nded for rrealtime
ealtime rrecordings
ecordings..

22.4.3 Setting the Realtime Recording Length

After starting a realtime recording, the recording time depends on your equipment’s settings.

1. Enter the [Record Setup]

Setup] menu.

2. Select [Wave Length]

Length] and toggle between [8
[8 ss],
], [[16 s] and [32
16 s] [32 s].
s].

 [8 s]:
s]: record a waveform 4 seconds before and 4 seconds after the current moment;

 [16 s]:
s]: record a waveform 8 seconds before and 8 seconds after the current moment;

 [32 s]:
s]: record a waveform 16 seconds before and 16 seconds after the current moment;
 22-2

22.4.4 Changing the Recording Speed

1. Enter the [Record Setup]
Setup] menu.

2. Select [Paper Speed]

Speed] and toggle between [25
[25 mm/s]
mm/s] and [50
[50 mm/s].
mm/s].

This setting is for

for all reco
recordings
rdings cont
containing
aining wavefo
waveforms.
rms.

22.4.5 Switching Gridlines On or Off

1. Enter the [Record Setup]
Setup] menu.

2. Select [Gridlines
Gridlines]] and toggle between [On
[ On]] and [Off
[Off].

 [On]: show gridlines when recording waveforms..

On]: waveforms..

 [Off]: hide gridlines when recording waveform

waveforms.
s.

This setting is for

for all rec
recordings
ordings con
containing
taining wavef
waveforms.
orms.

22.5 Loading Paper

1. Use the latch at the upper right of the re
recorder
corder door to pull the door o
open.
pen.

2. Insert a new
new pape
paperr roll int
into
o the
the ccompartment
ompartment as show
shown
n be
below.
low.

3. Close the recorder door.

4. Check if paper is loaded ccorrectly

orrectly and the paper e
end
nd is feeding ffrom
rom the top.

50 mm recorder 80 mm recorder
 22-3

CAUTION

 Use only specified thermal paper. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the recorder’s print head, the
recorder may be unable to print, or poor print quality may result.

 Never pull the recorder paper with force when a recording is in process. Otherwise, it may cause damage to

the recorder.
 Do not leave the recorder door open unless you have to reload paper or remove troubles.

22.6 Removing Paper Jam

If the recorder works incorrectly
incorrectly or produces unusual sounds, check if there is a paper jam first. If a paper jam is detected,
follow this procedure to remove it:

1. Open the recorder door.

2. Take out the paper and tear off the draped part.

3. Reload the paper and close the recorder door.

22.7 Cleaning the Recorder Print head

If the recorder has been used for a long time, deposits of paper debris may collect on the print head compromising the
print quality and shortening
shor tening the lifetime of the roller
roller.. Follow this procedure to clean the print head:

1. Take me
measures
asures against the static electricity, such as disposable wr
wrist
ist strap, for the work.

2. Open the recorder door and take out the paper.

3. Gently wipe ar
around
ound the print he
head
ad using cotton swabs dam
dampened
pened w
with
ith alco
alcohol.
hol.

4. After tthe
he alcohol has comp
completely
letely be
been
en drie
dried,
d, reload the paper and close the recorder
recorder door.

CAUTION
 Do not use anything that may destroy the thermal element.

 Do not add unnecessary force to the thermal head.

 22-4

23 Network Connection
23.1 Overview
With AP modules and 3G routers, the equipment can work as part of the PHEIS system and be connected to a Central
Monitoring System (hereinafter
(hereinafter called CMS) and send the following information to the CMS to support further
treatment:

 Patient information;

 Equipment information;

 Configuration information;

 Waveforms;

 Monitoring parameters;

 Alarms and prompt messages;

 Time and date;

date; and,

 Working mode.

Caution

 The PHEIS system shall be installed and maintained by professional service personnel. If any problem
occurs, contact the manufacturer for support.

23.2 Connecting CMS

1. Make sure there a
are
re available beds on the CMS for the admission o
off the equipment.

2. Press the Main Menu bu

button
tton o
on
n the front pane
panel,l, and then sele
select
ct [[Others >>]
Others >>]  [[Network >>].
Network Connection >>].

3. Select a site in the

the drop down list or [Site IP Address]
Address] to input the IP address of the target CMS.

4. Select [Connect Network].

5. Exit the Network C

Connection
onnection m
menu
enu and ccheck
heck the main screen
screen.. Network connection icon
icon will be displayed in the
 prompt area. indicates that the connection succeeds, while indicates that the connection fails.

23-1

23.3 General Settings

23.3.1 Setting Local IP
1. Press the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>]
Others >>]  [[Configuration >>] and then enter
Configuration >>]
the required password.

2. Select [Network Setup]

Setup] in the configuration menu.

3. Select [Local IP Address],

Address], rotate the navigate knob to select a number and then press the knob

4. Select [Return
Return]] and then exit configuration mode.

Caution

 Do not change the local IP address randomly. If any problem occurs, contact the manufacturer for support.

23.3.2 Storing Preset Sites

You can store up to 8 preset sites which can be selected in the drop-down list once successfully stored.

1. Press the Main Menu but

button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel,
panel, and then se
select
lect [[Others >>]
Others >>]  [[Configuration >>] and then enter
Configuration >>]
the required password.

2. Select [Network Setup]

Setup] in the configuration menu.

3. Select a number
number in the drop-down list after [Select Site]
Site] and enter the name and IP address of the target CMS in the
[Site Name]
Name] and [Set
[Set IP Address]
Address] boxes.

4. Exit the configuration menu to confirm the configuration.

 23-2

24 Configuration Management
24.1 Introduction
Configurations management enables you to customize you equipment to best meet your needs. With this function, you
can:

 Change system configuration;

 Record system configuration;

 Restore the factory default configuration.

After the system configurations have been changed, the equipment restarts and new configuration settings take effect
immediately.

24.2 Password
Accessing configuration management is password protected. The required password is set to 315666 before the
equipment leaves the factory.

24.3 Accessing Configuration Management

To access config
configuration
uration manag
management,
ement, mo
move
ve the Mode Select knob to Monito
Monitor,
r, Manual D
Defib
efib or P
Pacer
acer,, and then press
press the
Main Menu button on the front panel. Patient monitoring and therapy automatically end when you enter the
Configuration
Configuration Main menu.

1. Press the Main Menu bu

button
tton o
on
n the front pane
panell of the e
equipment.
quipment. Select [Others >>]
>>] → [[Configuration >>], a
Configuration >>],
dialog box pops up as shown below:

 To view the configurations or change system time, select [View Config]. In this case, password is not required.

 To close the dialog box and rreturn

eturn to no
normal
rmal operating mode, selec
selectt [[Cancel].
Cancel].
 24-1

2. Enter the required password and then select [OK]

OK] to enter the Configuration Main menu as shown below:

 Selecting [Factory
[Factory Config]
Config] and confirming the selection restores all the current settings to factory default
settings:

 Selecting [Record] records the settings of all system configurations.

 Selecting [Exit
[Exit]] pops up a dialog box as shown below:

WARNING

 Never connect the equipment with the patient while performing configuration management.

24.3.1 General Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Device Name 20 characters / The characters are included in
Institution Name 20 characters / the keyboard. Restoring factory
Department 20 characters / default configurations does not

Bed No. 20 characters / change these items.

Patient Cat. Adu, Ped, Neo Adu /

Height Unit cm, inch cm /

Weight unit kg, lb kg /

Chinese, English, French, German, Italian,

Language Polish, Spanish, Portuguese
Portuguese,, Russian, Czech, / /
 Turkish, Dutch, Hungarian
Hungarian

24-2

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

Data Format yyyy-mm-dd, mm-dd-yyyy, dd-mm-yyyy yyyy-mm-dd /

Time Format
Format 12 h, 24 h 24 h /

Year 2007 to 2099 2007 /

Month 01 to 12 01 /

Day 01 to 31 01 /

System Time 24 h: 00 to 23 24 h: 00
Hour /
12 h: 12AM to 11PM 12 h: 12AM

Minute 00 to 59 00 /

Second 00 to 59 00 /

24.3.2 Manual Defib Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
[Set Password]
Password] is active only when [Manual
[Manual
Manual Therapy Access Direct, Confirmed, Password Direct
Access] is set to [Password
Therapy Access] [Password].
].
Set Password 4 digits 0000 (0000-9999)

Pads Default 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 150, 170, 200, 300 J 200 J /
Internal Default 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 10 /
Time to Auto Disarm 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s 60s /
Syn After Shock Yes, No No /
Remote Sync On, Off Off /
Monitor Para. 1 Off
SpO2, NIBP, CO2, IBP1 (Label), IBP2
Monitor Para. 2 Off The three parameters
parameters are mutually exclusive.
exclusive.
(Label), Temp, Off
Monitor Para. 3 Off
Charge Tone Vlm High, Med, Low Med /
Contact Impedance IndicatorOn, Off Off /

24.3.3 AED Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
In AED mode, if Shock Series change,
defibrillation energies will change
accordingly. But if the working mode has
Shock Series 1, 2, 3 1
been switched, the Shock Series will be
cleared while the energy proceeds from
the energy of the last shock.
Energy 1 100, 150, 170, 200, 300, 360J 200 J ≤Energy 2
Energy 2 Energy 1 to 360J 300 J Cannot be less than Energy 1
Energy 3 Energy 2 to 360J 360 J Cannot be less than Energy 2

Time to Auto Disarm 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s 60s /

Initial CPR Time Off, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s Off /
 CPR Time 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180s 120s /

24-3

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

CPR Metronome On, Off On /
CPR Mode 30:2, 15:2, Compression_o
Compression_only
nly 30:2 /
NSA Action Monitor, CPR CPR /
Voice Prompts On, Off On /
Voice Volume High, Med, Low High /

Voice Prompt Interval Off, 30s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 150s, 180s 30s /
Voice Recording On, Off Off /

24.3.4 Pacer Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
Pacer Rate 40 to 170 ppm 70 ppm
Pacer Output 0 to 200 mA 30 mA
Default Pacer Mode Demand Mode, Fixed Mode Demand Mode

24.3.5 ECG Setup

Menu Item
Menu
Options/Range Default Remark
ECG Standard AHA, IEC AHA /
Notch Filter 50Hz, 60Hz 50Hz /
ECG Bandwidth Monitor, Therapy Therapy /
The default waveform
waveform position in [Waveform
[Waveform Setup]
Setup]
Lead Set 3-Lead, 5-Lead, 12-Lead 3-Lead menu is determined according to the setting of [Lead
[Lead
set] defined in [ECG
set] [ECG Setup]
Setup] menu.
This setting is linked with the [[Beat Vol] setting in the
Beat Vol]
QRS Volume 0 to 10 2
[SpO2 Setup]
Setup] menu
3-Lead: II, I, III
Available options are defined by the current setting of
ECG1 5-Lead: II, I, III, aVL, aVR, aVF, V II

12-Lead: II, I, III, aVL, aVR, aVF, V1 [Lead set].

set].

3-Lead: / / 1. If 3-lead is used, the default setting of this item is

ECG2 5-Lead: II, I, III, aVL, aVR, aVF, V V blank and this item is inactivate.

12-Lead:
12-Lead: III,I, II,, II
III,I, aV
aVL,
L, aVR,
aVR, aV
aVF,
F, V
V1
1 V1 2. The options of ECG1 are not available for ECG2.

Sweep 6.25/12.5/25/50 mm/s 25 mm/s Paper speed.

HR Alarm On, Off On /
HR Alm Lev High, Med, Low Med /
Adu (Low+2) to 300 120
HR High Ped 160 /
(Low+2) to 350
Neo 200
Adu 50
HR Low Ped 15 to (High-2) 75 /
Neo 100
 24-4

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

Arrhythmia On, Off Off /
ARR Alarm On, Off On /
ARR Alm Lev PVCs/min High, Med, Low Med /
R ON T
VT>2

Couplet
PVC
Vent Rhythm
Bigeminy
Trigeminy
Tachy
Brady
PNP
PNC
Missed Beat
Multif. PVCs

Nonsus. Vtac
Pause
Irr. Rhythim
Asystole Delay 3 to 10 5 /
V-Tach Rate 100 to 200 130 /
V-Tach PVCs 3 to 99 6 /
Vbrd Rate 15 to 60 40 /
Vbrd PVCs 3 to 99 5 /
Adu 60 to 300 160 /
Extreme Tachy
Ped 60 to 300 180 /
Adu 15 to 120 35 /
Extreme Brady
Ped 15 to 120 50 /
PVCs High 1 to 10 10 /
Adu 60 to 300 120 /
Tachy
Ped 60 to 300 160 /
Adu 15 to 200 50 /
Brady
Ped 15 to 200 75 /
Multif. PVCs Window 3 to 31 15 /
Pause Time 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 2.0 /
 24-5

24.3.6 12-Lead Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

Medication

Class

Height

Select Weight
Patient Info. V3 On, Off Off /
Options Placement

Institution

Department

Physician

Patient Info. Input Prompt On, Off On /

Tachy (Adu) 80 to 130 100 /
Brady (Adu) 40 to 60 50 /
OTc Formula Hodges, Bazett, Fridericia, Framingham Hodges /
Report Content Standard, Measureme
Measurements
nts Only Standard /

3 × 4, 3 × 4 Compact, 4 × 3, Median
Report Format Complexes, Measurements Matrix 3×4 /

24.3.7 12-Lead Transmission Setup

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Site Name Site # 1 to Site # 8 / Max. 15 characters
Fax No. Fax No. of Site # 1 to Site # 8 / Max. 20 digits
Fax Format 3×4, 2×6, 1×12 3×4 /
Transmit Speed
Speed 2400 bps, 7200 bps 7200 bps /

24.3.8 Resp Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

RR Alarm On, Off Off /

RR Alm Lev High, Med, Low Med /
Sweep 6.25/12.5/25 mm/s 6.25mm/s /
Adu 30 /
(Low+2) to 100
RR High Ped 30 /
Neo (Low+2) to 150 100 /
Adu 8 /
RR Low Ped 6 to (High-2) 8 /
Neo 30 /

Apnea Time 10/15/20/25/30/35/40s 20s /

 24-6

24.3.9 SpO2 Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
SpO2 Alarm On, Off On /
SpO2 Alm Lev High, Med Med /
Sweep 12.5mm/s, 25 mm/s 25 mm/s /
Adu 100

SpO2 High Ped (Low+1) to 100 100 /

Neo 95
Adu 90
SpO2 Low Ped Desat Limit to (High-1) 90 /

Neo 90
Adu 80
Desat Ped 50 to (High-1) 80 /

Neo 80
Averaging Masimo SpO2 2-4s, 4-6s, 8s, 10s, 12s, 14s, 16s 8s For Masimo SpO2 module only.
Mindray SpO2 High, Med, Low Med Different options are available to
Sensitivity
Masimo SpO2 Normal, Maximum Normal match the SpO2 module used.

Pitch Tone Mode 1, Mode 2 Mode 1 /

Sat-Seconds 0s, 10s, 25s, 50s, 100s 0s For Nellcor SpO2 module only.

24.3.10 PR Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
PR Alarm On, Off Off /
PR Alm Lev High, Med, Low Med /
Adu 120
PR High Ped (Low+2) to 240 160
Neo 200 PR ranges are different for different
Adu 50 modules.

PR Low Ped 25 to (High-2) 75

Neo 100
This setting is linked
linked with the [[QRS
QRS
QRS Volume 0 to 10 2 Volume]] setting in the [ECG
Volume [ECG Setup]
Setup]
menu

24.3.11 NIBP Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Manual/1 min/2 min/2.5 min/3 min/5 min
Interval /10 min/15 min/20 min/30 min/1 h/1
h/1.5
.5 Manual /

h/2 h /3 h/4 h/8 h

Alarm limits are refreshed in real time
 Press. Unit mmHg, kPa mmHg
when pressure unit is changed.

24-7

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

A
la
rm NIBP-Sys /
NIBP-Dia On, Off On

NIBP-Mean
Alm Lev High, Med Med /
Adu (Low+5) to 270 160

Sys High Ped (Low+5) to 200 120 /

Neo (Low+5) to 135 90
Adu 90
Sys Low Ped 40 to (High-5) 70 /

Neo 40
Adu (Low+5) to 230 110
Mean High Ped (Low+5) to 165 90 /

Neo (Low+5) to 110 70

Adu 60
Mean Low Ped 20 to (High-5) 50 /

Neo 25

Adu (Low+5) to 210 90

Dia High Ped (Low+5) to 150 70 /

Neo (Low+5) to 100 60

Adu 50
Dia Low Ped 10 to (High-5) 40 /

Neo 20

24.3.12 CO2 Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Alarm On, Off On /
Alm Lev High, Med Med /

Press. Unit mmHg, kPa, % mmHg Alarm limits are refreshed in real time when
pressure unit is changed.
Sweep 6.25mm/s, 12.5mm/s, 25 mm/s 6.25mm/s /
mmHg 15/20/25/40/50/60/80 50
Different options are available to match the
Scale kPa 2/2.5/3.5/5/7/8/10 7
selected pressure unit.
% 2/2.5/3.5/5/7/8/10 7
For sidestream CO2 module only. If
Flow Rate 70/100 ml/min 100 ml/min microstream CO2 module is used, this item
will be inactive.
Adu 50 The range is different
different according
according to the
EtCO2 High Ped (Low+2) to 99 50 selected pressure unit. The default pressure
Neo 45 unit is mmHg.

Adu 15 The range is different

different according
according to the
EtCO2 Low Ped 0 to (High-2) 20 selected pressure unit. The default pressure
Neo 30 unit is mmHg.

24-8

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

Adu 4 The range is different according
according to the
FiCO2 High Ped 0 to 99 4 selected pressure unit. The default pressure
Neo 4 unit is mmHg.

Adu 30 The range is different according

according to the
awRR High Ped (Low+2) to 100 30 selected pressure unit. The default pressure

Neo 100 unit is mmHg.

Adu 8
The range is different according
according to the
Ped 8
awRR Low 6 to (High-2) selected pressure unit. The default pressure
Neo 30 unit is mmHg.

Apnea Time 10/15/20/25/30/35/40s 20s /

24.3.13 IBP Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Sweep 12.5mm/s, 25 mm/s 25 mm/s /

Filter 8 Hz, 12.5Hz, 20 Hz 12.5Hz /

Sys
Alarm Dia On, Off On /
Mean
Alm Lev High, Med, Low Med /

1. Available options are

Label 1 refreshed in real time when IBP
(IBP 1) Art, PA, CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, Ao, UAP, UVP, BAP, FAP, label and pressure unit are
Art
P1, P2 changed.

Label 2 2. IBP1 label should always be

(IBP 2) different with IBP2 label.

Measure All, Mean All /

Press. IBP 1
mmHg, kPa, cmH2O mmHg
Unit IBP 2

Art, Ao, UAP, BAP and FAP Settings

Note: The pressure unit is mmHg by default.

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Upper Scale (Lower Scale +2) to 300 150

The middle scale
scale is the aver
average
age of upper scale and lower scale by default.
When the upper scale or lower scale is changed, the middle scale will change
Middle Scale according to the formula: Middle Scale = 1/2 (Upper Scale + Lower Scale). You 75
can also adjust the middle separately within the range of (Lower Scale +1) to
 (Upper Scale-1).
Lower Scale 0 to (Upper Scale-2) 0

24-9

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Adu 160
Sys High Ped (Low+2) to 300 120
Neo 90
Adu 90
Sys Low Ped 0 to (High-2) 70

Neo 55
Adu 110
Mean High Ped (Low+2) to 300 90
Neo 70
Adu 70
Mean Low Ped 0 to (High-2) 50
Neo 35
Adu 90
Dia High Ped (Low+2) to 300 70
Neo 60
Adu 50

Dia Low Ped 0 to (High-2) 40

Neo 20

PA Settings

Note: The pressure unit is mmHg by default.

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Upper Scale (Lower Scale +2) to 120 100
The middle scale is the ave
average
rage of upper scale and lowe
lowerr scale by defau
default.
lt. When the
upper scale or lower scale is changed, the middle scale will change according to the
Middle Scale 50
formula: Middle Scale = 1/2 (Upper Scale + Lower Scale). You can also adjust the middle
separately within the range of (Lower Scale +1) to (Upper Scale-1).
Lower Scale -6 to (Upper Scale-2) 0
Adu 35
Sys High Ped (Low+2) to 120 60
Neo 60
Adu 10
Sys Low Ped -6 to (High-2) 24
Neo 24
Adu 20
Mean High Ped (Low+2) to 120 26
Neo 26
Adu 0
Mean Low Ped -6 to (High-2) 12
Neo 12

24-10

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Adu 16
Dia High Ped (Low+2) to 120 4
Neo 4
Adu 0
Dia Low Ped -6 to (High-2) -4

Neo -4

CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, UVP Settings

Note: The pressure unit is cmH2O by default.

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Upper Scale (Lower Scale +2) to 40 40
The middle scale is the aver
average
age of upper scale and lower scale by default.
When the upper scale or lower scale is changed, the middle scale will change
Middle Scale according to the formula: Middle Scale = 1/2 (Upper Scale + Lower Scale). You 20
can also adjust the middle separately within the range of (Lower Scale +1) to

(Upper Scale-1).
Lower Scale -10 to (Upper Scale-2) 0
Adu 13.6
Mean High Ped (Low+2) to 40 5.4
Neo 5.4
Adu 0
Mean Low Ped -10 to (High-2) 0
Neo 0

P1 and P2 Settings

Note: The pressure unit is mmHg by default.

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Upper Scale (Lower Scale +2) to 300 150

The middle scale is the aver

average
age of upper scale and lower scale by default.
When the upper scale or lower scale is changed, the middle scale will change
Middle Scale according to the formula: Middle Scale = 1/2 (Upper Scale + Lower Scale). 75
You can also adjust the middle separately within the range of (Lower Scale
+1) to (Upper Scale-1).

Lower Scale -50 to (Upper Scale-2) 0

Measure All, Mean All

Adu 160
Sys High Ped (Low+2) to 300 120
 Neo 90

24-11

Menu Item Options/Range Default

Adu 90
Sys Low Ped -50 to (High-2) 70
Neo 55
Adu 110
Mean High Ped (Low+2) to 300 90

Neo 70
Adu 70
Mean Low Ped -50 to (High-2) 50
Neo 35
Adu 90
Dia High Ped (Low+2) to 300 70
Neo 60
Adu 50
Dia Low Ped -50 to (High-2) 40
Neo 20

24.3.14 Temp Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Alarm On, Off On /
Alm Lev High, Med, Low Med /
Alarm limits are refreshed in real time when
Temp Unit ℃, ℉ ℃
temperature
temperature unit is changed.
Adu 39.0 /
T1 High Ped (Low+1) to 50 39.0 /
Neo 39.0 /
Adu 36.0 /
T1 Low Ped 0 to (High-1) 36.0 /
Neo 36.0 /
Adu 39.0 /
T2 High Ped (Low+1) to 50 39.0 /
Neo 39.0 /
Adu 36.0 /
T2 Low Ped 0 to (High-1) 36.0 /
Neo 36.0 /
Adu 2.0 /
TD High Ped 0 to 50 2.0 /
Neo 2.0 /
 24-12

24.3.15 Waveform Setup Menu

Menu Item Options Default Remark

Wave 1 / ECG1 ECG1 Unchangeable

3-lead Pleth, CO2, IBP1

IBP1 (Label)
(Label),, IBP2 (Lab
(Label),
el), Resp Pleth
For optional
Wave 2 ECG2, Pleth, CO2, IBP1 (Label), IBP2
5/12-lead ECG2 parameters,
parameters, options of
(Label), Resp
waveforms are
3-lead CO2
Wave 3 available only when
5/12-lead Pleth
Pleth, CO2, IBP1 (Label), IBP2 (Label), Resp the parameters are
3-lead IBP1 (Label)
Wave 4 configured.
5/12-lead CO2
CO2 Wave Type Draw, Fill Draw /

ECG Green

RESP Yellow
SpO2 Cyan
The same as the
the /
PR
color of PR source
Parameter/Wave NIBP Green, Yellow, Cyan, White, Red, Blue, Purple, Orange White
Color
CO2 Yellow
TEMP White

IBP1 Label Red Always consistent

with the color of IBP
IBP2 Label Blue label you select.

24.3.16 Alarm Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
Alarm Pause Time 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15 min, Permanent 2 min
Audio Off Enabled, Disabled Disabled
0 to 10 (If Audio Off is enabled),
Alarm Volume 2
1 to 10 (If Audio Off is disabled)
Reminder Tone On, Off Off
Reminder Volume High, Med, Low Med
Latching Alarms Yes, No No
Displaying Alarm Limits Yes, No Yes
ECG Lead Off Alm Lev High, Med, Low Low
SpO2 Sensor Off Alm Lev High, Med, Low Low
Service Indicator On,
No battery Service Indicator On
Service Indicator Off
High Level Alarm 3 to 15s 10s
Alarm Tone
 Med Level Alarm 3 to 30s 20s
Interval
Low Level Alarm 15 to 100s 20s

24-13

24.3.17 Mark Event Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark
Event A Generic Generic Unchangeable
Event B Adrenalin
Event C Lidocaine
Adrenalin, Lidocaine, Atropine, Nitroglycerin,
Nitroglycerin, Event names that have been
Event D Morphine, Intubation, IV Access, Adenosine, Atropine selected by previous events
Event E Nitroglycerin
Amiodarone,, Vasopressin, Isoprenaline,
Amiodarone will not be included in the
Event F Morphine
Dopamine, Aspirin, Oxygen, CPR options of later events.
Event G Intubation
Event H IV Access
Custom Event 1 Options: entering event name using the
After being defined, custom
Custom Event 2 keyboard included in the [Mark
[Mark Event Setup]
Setup]
/ event is refreshed in real-time
Custom Event 3 menu.
in the Mark Event list.
Custom Event 4 Range: 1 to 20 characters

24.3.18 Record Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
Wave Length 8s, 16s, 32s 8s
Paper Speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25mm/s, 50mm/s 25mm/s
Energy Delivered Output On, Off Off
For 50 mm recorder: On
Gridlines On, Off
For 88 mm recorder: Off
Charge Event Off
Shock Event On
On, Off
Auto Record Marked Event Off
12-Lead Report On
Auto Test Report On, Off, Only if Failed On
HR
ARR
PVCs
Resp
SpO2
Alm Rec On, Off Off
PR
NIBP
IBP
CO2
Temp
 24-14

24.3.19 Data Management Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
Tabular Trends Interval
Interval 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min 5 min
Event Wave Length 8s, 16s, 32s 16 s

24.3.20 User Test Setup Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
User Test Prompt On, Off Off
Auto Test Time 0:00, 1:00,2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 5:00 3:00

24.3.21 Network Setup

Menu Item Options/Range Default Remark

Local IP Address 0 - 255 192.168.0.100

Not affected by the “Restore
“Restore
Subnet Mask 0 - 255 255.255.255.0
to factory default” operation
Gateway 0 - 255 192.168.0.254

Default Network Connection On, Off Off /

Select Site 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1

Enter the name of the target

Site Name /
CMS At most 8 sites

Enter the IP address of the target

Site IP Address /
CMS

24.3.22 Others Menu

Menu Item Options/Range Default
Brightness 1 to 10 8
Key Volume 0 to 10 2
Wave Line Thick, Medium, Thin Medium
Draw wave Mono, Color Color
SPO2
NIBP
M
o CO2
d
u On, Off On
le
s Resp
Te
Temp
mp
IBP
 24-15

FOR YOUR NOTES

 24-16

25 Batteries
25.1 Introduction
The equipment
equipment is designed to opera
operate
te on battery po
power
wer wh
when
en external power
power supply is not available. The battery is
charged whenever the equipment is connected to AC mains or the DC power supply through an external DC/AC adapter,
regardless
regardless of whether or not the equipment is currently turned on. In case of power failure, the equipment will
automatically run power from internal batteries. So we recommend you always install a fully charged battery in the
equipment.

The equipment
equipment can be conf
configured
igured with two smart lithium ion batterie
batteriess which are ffree
ree of m
maintenance.
aintenance. Battery
Battery icons 1
and 2 displayed on the screen correspond with Battery 1 and Battery 2, see the figure below:

 Battery 1

 Battery 2

On-screen battery symbols indicate the current battery charge status, taking Battery 1 for an example:

 ≤100%, but >80% of capacity

 ≤80%, but >60% of capacity

 ≤60%, but >40% of capacity

 ≤40%, but >20% of capacity

 ≤ 20% of capacity

 Low battery and charging is required immediat

immediately
ely

 Battery 1 is not installed

Yo
You
u can also check the battery’s charge status by pressing the fuel gauge button on the battery to illuminate the battery
gauge. The fuel gauge consisting of 5 LEDs, each LED represents a charge of approximately 20% of capacity.

If the battery charge is too low, a technical alarm will be triggered and the “Low Battery” message displayed in the
Te
Technical
chnical Alarm Area.
Area. At this m
moment,
oment, chang
change
e the batte
battery
ry or apply extern
external
al power to the equipme
equipment.
nt.

WARNING

 Keep the batteries out of children’s reach.

 Use only specified batteries.

 The batteries should be charged in this equipment or in a device approved by the equipment
manufacturer.
 25-1

NOTE
 Always connect the equipment to AC mains whenever
w henever it is possible.

 Always install a fully charged battery in the equipment.

 After long term use, the power capacity indicated by the battery symbol may be different from the actual
capacity. Always observe the alarm information displayed on the screen.

25.2 Installing the Batteries

To install the batteries:
batteries:

1. Align a battery with the battery compartment

compartment..

2. Insert the battery,

battery, and press
press until you he
hear
ar it click into the plac
place.
e.

To replace a battery,
battery, press
press the latch on the battery and push the batt
battery
ery to the ri
right
ght until you
you remo
remove
ve it. Insert a new
battery into the battery compartment.

25.3 Battery Alarms

25.3.1 No Battery Alarm
You can configure the status of status indicator when no battery is installed in the configuration mode
mode..

Press the Main Menu button on the front panel of the equipment. Select [Others
[Others >>]
>>] → [[Configuratio
Configuration >>]
n >>] →enter the
required password. In the Configuration main menu, select [Alarm
[ Alarm Setup]
Setup] → [[No Battery], and toggle between [Service
No Battery], [ Service
On] and [Service
Indicator On] [Service Indicator Off]. The default setting is [Service
[ Service Indicator Off].

 If [[Service On] is selected, the service indicator flashes in the case that battery is not installed,
Service Indicator On]
meanwhile a message “No Battery” is presented in the Technical Alarm Area.

 If [[Service
Service Indicator Off] is selected, the service indicator will not be illuminate in the case that battery is
not installed; the message “No Battery” will be presented in the Technical Alarm Area.

25.3.2 Low Battery Alarm

If the equipment is run on battery and the battery charge is low, a technical alarm “Low
“Low Battery”
Battery” will be triggered. In this
case, replace the battery with a fully charged on or connect the equipment to external power supply immediately.

If the battery is almost depleted, a prompt “Battery depleted! System will shut down imminently. Connect to AC mains or
replace battery” pops
pops up. IIn
n monitoring, manual defibrillation, and pacing mode, additional alarm lights and alarm tones
are provided.
provided. In this case, take appropriate actions immediately
immediately.. This prompt will not disappear until the battery is
replaced or the equipment is connected to the external power supply. The equipment automatically shuts down if no

action is taken within a period of about 3 minutes.

 25-2

NOTE

 The Low Battery alarm means that the battery is beginning to weaken and should be replaced at the first
opportunity. At least 20 minutes of monitoring and six full energy shocks can be performed when the Low
Battery alarm is activated. Replace the battery or connect the equipment to AC mains as soon as possible.

25.3.3 Battery Aged Alarm

If the battery runtime is significantly shorter than the specification, a low level technological alarm “Battery
“Battery 1 (or 2)
Aged”” will be presented. We recommend you to contact our company and replace it with a new one.
Aged

25.3.4 Battery Error Alarm

In the situation that the battery has a failure, a high level technological alarm “Battery
“Battery 1 (or 2) Err”
Err” will be presented. In
this case, replace the battery or contact your service personnel.

25.4 Checking the Batteries

Battery capacity diminishes with use and age. To check the performance of the batteries, follow this procedure:

1. Connect the
the equipme
equipment
nt to th
the
e extern
external
al power sup
supply
ply and allow the batteri
batteries
es to charge
charge uninterruptedly
uninterruptedly ti
tillll it is fully
charged.

2. Remove the exte

external
rnal power supply and allow the e
equipment
quipment to run from the batteries until it shuts off.

The operating time of the batteries rreflects

eflects their pe
performance
rformance dir
directly.
ectly. If the operating time of the batteries is noticeably
noticeably
shorter than that stated in the specifications, discard the batteries
batteries or contact your service personnel.

NOTE

 Life expectancy of a battery depends on how frequent and how long it is used. When properly cared for,

the lithium-ion battery has a useful life of approximately 2 years. For improper use models, life expectancy
can be less. We recommend replacing lithium-ion batteries every 2 years.

 To optimize performance, a depleted, or nearly depleted battery should be charged as soon as possible.

 Battery operating time depends on the device configuration and operation. For example, measuring NIBP
repeatedly will shorten the battery operating time.
 25-3

25.5 Charging batteries

The batteries
batteries can be charg
charged
ed only whe
when
n they are installed in the equipment or using an de
device
vice approve
approved
d by the
equipment manufacturer. With the equipment turned off and at a temperature of 25 ℃ (77℉), a completely discharged
discharged
battery charges to 80% of its capacity in approximately 2 hours, and to 100% of its capacity in approximately 3 hours.
Batteries charge at a lower rate with the equipment turned on.

Batteries should be charged at temperatures between 0℃ (32℉) to 45℃ (113℉). To optimize performance, a fully (or
nearly fully) discharged battery should be charged as soon as possible.

25.6 Storing Batteries

When storing batteries,
batteries, make sure that the battery terminals do not come into contact with metallic objects. If batteries
are stored for an extended period of time, they should be placed in a cool place with a partial charge of 40% to 60%
capacity (3 LEDs illuminated). Storing batteries in a cool place slows the aging process. The idea storage temperature is
15℃ (60℉). Batteries should not be stored at temperature outside the range of -20℃ (-4℉) to 60℃ (140℉).

Remove the battery from the equipment if the equipment is not used for a prolonged time. Otherwise the battery may
be over discharged and it will take significantly longer time to charge the battery. Stored batteries should be charged
every 2 months to 40% to 60% of full capacity. They should be charged to full capacity prior to use.

NOTE

 Do not store a battery in the equipment if the equipment is not used for an extended period of time.

 Storing batteries at temperature above 38 (100℉) for an extended period of time significantly shorten
the life expectancy of a battery

25.7 Recycling the Batteries

A battery should be discarded if there are visual signs of damage, the battery fails, the battery aged alarm is presente
presented,
d,
or the batteries has been used for more than two years. Properly dispose of batteries according to local regulations.

WARNING

 Do not disassemble, puncture or incinerate batteries. Do not short the battery terminals. They may ignite,
explode, or leak, causing personal injury.
 25-4

26 Care and Cleaning

Use only the substances approved by the equipment manufacturer
manufacturer and methods listed in this chapter to clean or

disinfect your equipment. Warranty does not cover damages caused by unapproved cleaning and disinfection
substances or methods.

We make no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for controlling infection. For
For the
method to control infection, consult your hospital’s infection control officer or epidemiologist.
epidemiologist.

In this chapter we only describe cleaning and disinfection of the main unit. For the cleaning and disinfection of external
paddles and other reusable accessories, refer to instructions for use of corresponding accessories.

26.1 General Points

Keep you equipment and accessories free of dust and dirt. To avoid damage to the equipment, follow these rules:
 Always dilute according the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible concentration.

 Do not immerse part of the equipment into liquid.

 Do not pour liquid onto the equipment or accessorie

accessories.
s.

 Keep the paddles clean, Before user checks or after each use, thoroughly clean the paddles and paddle tray.

 Do not allow liquid to enter the case.

 Never use abrasive materials (such as steel wool or silver polish), or erosive cleaners (such as acetone or
acetone-based cleaners).

WARNING
 Be sure to shut down the system, disconnect the power cord and other cables, and remove the batteries
before cleaning the equipment.

CAUTION
 Contact your service personnel in case of spilling liquid on the equipment or accessories.

NOTE
  To clean or disinfect reusable accessories, refer to the instructions for use delivered with the accessories.

26-1

26.2 Cleaning
Your equipment should be cleaned on a regular basis. If there is heavy pollution or lots of dust and sand in your place,
the equipment should be cleaned more frequently. Before cleaning the equipment, consult your hospital’s regulations
for cleaning the equipment.

Recommended cleaning agents are:

 ammonia (diluted)

 sodium hypochlorite bleach (diluted)

 Hydrogen peroxide (3%)

 Ethanol (70%)

To clean your equipment,

equipment, ffollow
ollow these rrules:
ules:

1. Shut dow
down
n the equipment, disconnect the powe
powerr cord and othe
otherr cables, and remove
remove the batteries.

2. Clean tthe
he display screen using a soft, cle
clean
an clot
cloth
h dampe
dampened
ned w
with
ith a glass cle
cleaner.
aner.

3. Clean the exterior surface of the equi

equipment
pment using a soft, cle
clean
an cloth dam
dampened
pened with a glass cleane
cleaner.
r.

4. Clean tthe
he paddle
paddle tray using a soft, cle
clean
an cloth dampened with a glass cle
cleaner.
aner.

5. Wipe o
off
ff all the cle
cleaning
aning solut
solution
ion with a dry cloth aft
after
er cle
cleaning
aning if necessary.

6. Dry your equipment in a ventilated, cool place.

26.3 Disinfecting
Disinfection may cause damage to your equipment and is therefore not recommended unless otherwise indicated in
your hospital’s servicing schedule. Cleaning equipment before disinfecting is recommended.

The recommended
recommended disinfectants
disinfectants includ
include:
e: ethanol 70%, isopropanol 70%, and Perform* classic concentrate
concentrate OCY (KH
(KHSO
SO4
solution).
 26-2

27 Maintenance and Testing

WARNING
 Failure for the responsible individual, hospital or institution employing this equipment to implement a
satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure and possible health hazards.

 The safety checks or maintenance involving any disassembly of the equipment should be performed by
professional servicing personnel. Otherwise, undue equipment failure and possible health hazards could
result.

 If you find a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel or the manufacturer.

27.1 Overview
Before every use, each shift or once a week, checks shall be done to ensure that the equipment is ready for operation at
any time. After the equipment has been used for 12 months, or whenever the equipment is repaired or upgraded, a
thorough inspection should be performed by qualified service personnel to ensure the reliability.
reliability.

Items to be checked are as follows:

 Shift check

 Recorder inspection

 User test

 Manual defibrillation test

 Pacing test

 Functional modules test

 NIBP overpressure protection test

 Electrical safety tests.

Paddles and cables are critical parts for defibrillation but damageable. We rec
recommend
ommend you to check the appearance and
performance of these parts every day and replace them every 3 years.

The ECG cables

cables are criti
critical
cal parts for data acquisition and analysis but damage
damageable.
able. W
We
e recommend
recommend you
you to inspect the
the
cable as described in the Appendix C BeneHeart Defibrillator Shift Checklist.

In case of any damage or abnormity, remove the equipment from use. Contact the hospital’s biomedical engineers or
your service personnel immediately.
 27-1

27.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule

The following
following tests, e
except
xcept rrecorder
ecorder ccheck
heck and user test, shall be carri
carried
ed out by the service personnel
personnel only.
only. Contact yo
your
ur
service personnel if any maintenance is required. Make sure to clean and disinfect the equipment before any test and
maintenance.

Test
est ite
tem
m Weekl
eekly
y Aft
fter
er us
use
e 12 mo
mont
nths
hs 24 mon
onth
thss
Cleaning equipment and accessories ×

Routine Test ×

User test Energy delivery test ×

Controls test ×

Recorder check ×

ECG cable test ×

Charge/
discharge
Manual defibrillation tests
Energy disarming ×

Synchronous defibrillation
Pacing test

Accuracy test
NIBP tests ×
Leakage test

CO2 calibration test ×

NIBP overpressure protection test ×

Electrical safety tests as per IEC60601-1 ×

27.3 Carrying Out Maintenance and Testing

27.3.1 Power-on Tests
The equipment
equipment performs se
self
lf test each tim
time
e you tu
turn
rn it on or restart the eq
equipment.
uipment. If a failur
failure
e is detect tthe
he service
indicator will light and a message is presente
presented
d in the technological alarm area.
Power-on
Power-on self tests will check the following items:

 Power module,

 Main control system,

 Therapy module,
module, and

 Monitoring function.
 27-2

You need to power on the equipment every day, or when the equipment is first installed, or following any maintenance
or the replacement of any main unit parts to verify that the equipment can be turned on properly.

1. Place the external pad

paddles
dles on padd
paddle
le tray, insert the battery ((install
install both if two batter
batteries
ies are configured) in the
battery compartment,
compartment, and then connect the equipment with AC mains. In this case, both the AC indicator and
battery indicator shall light.

2. Turn the Mode Sele

Select
ct knob to Monitor. Che
Check
ck that the equipment passes the se
self
lf test and is turned on proper
properly.
ly.
3. Check the display of technical alarm area, prompt area and battery st
status
atus indicator on the u
upper
pper right corner of the
main screen to judge whether the equipment runs normally.

27.3.2 Shift Check

In order to ensure your defibrillator/monitor is ready when needed, we recommended you to inspect your equipment
and complete a check list at the change of every shift. See Appendix C BeneHeart Defibrillator Shift Checklist for
details.

27.3.3 Automated Tests

The equipment
equipment automatic
automatically
ally performs Rout
Routine
ine T
Test
est and weekly
weekly Energy De
Delivery
livery Test while the equipment
equipment is off b
but
ut AC
mains is connected to check the equipment’s operational performance and alert operators if a problem exists.

The following table prov

provides
ides the descrip
description
tion of automa
automated
ted test and list the fre
frequency
quency with w
which
hich each is perform
performed.
ed.
Test name Test items Frequency
Routine Test Batteries and therapy module (includes a 1 J internal discharge, Once per day, between 0:00 am to
and 10 J external discharge throug
through
h external paddles or pads 5:00 am
cable.)
Energy Delivery Test Delivers a 200 J internal discharge Once per week, at the completion
of Routine Test
Automated Daily Test can be initiated between 0:00 am to 5:00 am. To set auto test time, enter the Configuration Main
men, and select [Test
[Test Setup]
Setup] → [[Auto Time]. The default setting is 3:00 am.
Auto Test Time].

The equipment
equipment displays no inf
information
ormation on the scree
screen
n during Auto Te
Test.
st.
In the case that Auto T
Test
est fails, the service indicator is illuminated and the equipment gives a beep periodically till the
equipment is restarted. Then a low level technical alarm “Last Auto Test Failed” will be displayed. The “Last Auto Test
Failed” alarm is cleared if Auto Test is passed for the next time or the failed Routine Test or Energy Delivery Test is passed
during User Test. We recommend you to perform the User Test if Auto Test failed.

At the completion of Auto Test, a report is saved automatically. Enter the Configuration Main menu → select [Record
[Record
Setup]]
Setup → [Auto
[Auto Test Report]
Report] → select [On
[On],
], [[Off
Off], or [Only
[Only if Failed],
Failed], you can choose to print the Auto Test Report or not
after the tests are completed, or print it only if Auto Test Failed.

You can review the result of Auto Test by selecting the [History
[ History]] softkey from the User Test Main menu.
 27-3

NOTE
 With power off, auto Test is performed
p erformed only when AC mains is connected.

 Thoroughly clean the paddles and properly place them in the paddle tray after each use. Automated test
passes only when paddles properly contact the metal parts of the paddle tray.


Install at least one battery and
an d properly place the external paddles in the paddle tray or connect the pads
cable and 50 Ω test load. Otherwise the Auto Test will fail.

27.3.4 User Test

WARNING
 Do not perform user test when a patient is connected to the equipment.

User test covers the following items:

 Routine Test,

 Energy delivery test, and

 Controls test.

NOTE

 Before user test or after each use, thoroughly clean the paddles and properly place them in the paddle
tray. User test passes only when paddles properly contact the metal parts of the paddle tray.

 Install at least one battery and

an d properly place the external paddles in the paddle tray or connect the pads
cable and 50 Ω test load. Otherwise the User Test will fail.
 27-4

27.3.4.1 Entering the User Test Main Menu

To access user test, press tthe

he Main Menu butto
button
n and select [[User >>]. Then a dialog box pops up, prompting you
User Test >>].
that entering user test will end patient monitoring. Select [Y
[Yes]
es] to enter the User Test Main menu.

Check the test items you want to perform and select [Start
Start]] to start user test. The message “Test completed” will be
presented when selected tests have been finished. Then you can press the [ Record
Record]] soft key to print the test result.

27.3.4.2 Routine Test

Routine Test covers the following items:

 Batteries,

 Mainboard,

 Defib/Pacer function, and

 Monitor function

If any of above items fails, the service indicator will be illuminated. If mainboard, Defib/Pacer
Defib/Pacer function, or monitor
function fails, a low level technical alarm “Last User Test Failed” will be displayed in the technical alarm area when the
equipment is restarted. We recommend you to perform a successful User Test to clear this alarm.

27.3.4.3 Energy Delivery Test

Energy delivery test delivers a 200J external discharge to check the defibrillation circuit.

If the test fails, the service indicator will be illuminated and a low level technical alarm “Last User Test Failed” will be
displayed in the technical alarm area when the equipment is restarted. We recommend you to perform a successful User
Te
Test
st to clear this
this alarm.
 27-5

27.3.4.4 Controls Test

Controls test covers the following items:

 Mode Select knob,

 All hardkeys on the equipment’s front panel;

 Audio test, and

 Display test
Follow the displayed prompts to run the controls test.

NOTE
 The tested controls are indicated in green during controls test.

If any of above items fails, the service indicator will be illuminated and a low level technical alarm “Last User Test Failed”
will be displayed in the technical alarm area when the equipment is restarted. We recommend you to perform a
successful User Test to clear this alarm.

NOTE
 The“Off” position of the Mode Select knob is not tested during the Controls Test. If you turn the knob to
“Off” for more than 3 seconds. The equipment is turned off.

27.3.4.5 Test Summaries

The results
results of User Te
Test
st are automatically
automatically save
saved
d as summaries
summaries.. You
You can select tthe
he [History
[History]] button from the User Test
Main menu to review the test summaries.

The equipment
equipment can store up to 300 histor
historical
ical test summ
summaries
aries which are listed in the sequence o
off time, with
with the latest o
on
n
the top. You can use the knob to select a test result and press the knob to check the detailed test report.
 27-6

27.3.4.6 User Test Reminder

We recommend that Routine Test and Energy Delivery Test are executed once per week and Controls Test once every 12
months.

Each time when the equipment is turned on, the time to last Routine Test, Energy Delivery Test and Controls Test is
checked automatically. The equipment can be configured to give a “User Test Due” message to remind you that the
equipment is due for User Test.

The [User
[User Test Prompt]
Prompt] is switched off by default. Y
You
ou can switch it on by selecting [[User Setup]
User Test Setup] [User Test
→

Prompt]]
Prompt →[On
On]] through the configuration mode.

NOTE
 In case that automated Routine Test is not performed, we recommend you to run Routine Test once per
day through User Test.

27.3.5 Recorder Inspection

1. Turn the Mode Select knob to Monitor
Monitor..

2. Start recording
recording to verify that the reco
recorder
rder wor
works
ks properly and the pr
printout
intout is le
legible
gible and correct.

3. Simulate errors,
errors, such as removing the paper roll and lo
losing
sing the latch, correct
correct information
information shall be sho
shown
wn in the
prompt area. The recorder shall work properly after the faults are corrected.

27.3.6 ECG Cable Test

It is recommended to perform ECG cable test once a year.

Te
Test
st tool: ECG simulator

Follow this procedure to perform ECG cable test:

1. Turn the Mode Sele
Select
ct knob to “Monitor”. For 12-lead ECG cables, you need to press “12-Lead ECG” hardkey
hardkey to ent
enter
er
12-lead ECG screen.

2. Connect the EC
ECG
G cable to the defibrillator and the electrodes to the simulator.

3. Turn on the simulator and select a normal ECG rhythm.

4. Wait for a few se

seconds
conds and ccheck
heck that tthe
he wavefor
waveform
m is display
displayed
ed norm
normally
ally and that no lead-off alarms reported
reported in
the alarm information area.

For 12-lead ECG cables, select “Record” button to record realtime 12-lead ECG waveform. Make sure that there are normal
ECG waveforms displayed for each lead on the printout.
 27-7

27.3.7 Manual Defibrillation Test

Te
Test
st tools: defibrillator/pacer
defibrillator/pacer analyzer

Charge/discharge

1. Remove the batteri

batteries
es and conne
connect
ct the equipment with AC m
mains.
ains. Turn the Mode Select
Select knob to Manual Defib.

2. Connect th
the
e external paddles to the equipm
equipment
ent and place the paddles on the defibrillator/pacer
defibrillator/pacer analyzer.

3. Enter the C
Configuration
onfiguration Main scre
screen.
en. Fr
From
om tthe
he Rec
Record
ord Se
Setup
tup m
menu
enu se
sett [[Shock Event] to [On
Shock Event] [On]] so that shock events
can be recorded automatically if happened.

4. Set the analyzer to Energy Measurement mode. In this case, tthe

he energy value should be displayed as 0 or blank.

5. Select the energy level to 1J.

6. Charge/discharg
Charge/discharge
e the equipment tto
o verify the ene
energies
rgies me
measured
asured by the analyzer
analyzer meet the following accuracy:

Selected Energy (J) Measured Value (J)

1 0 to 3
100 85 to 115
360 306 to 414

7. Set the energy to 100J and 360J respectively. Repeat Step 6.

8. Disconnect tthe
he equipm
equipment
ent from the AC mains. Run the equipment on fully ch
charged
arged batte
battery.
ry. Move the Mode Select
knob to Manual Defib. Repeat Steps 2 to 7.

9. Verify that tthe

he equipment
equipment records the shock events automatically and cor
correctly.
rectly.

10. Use multif

multifunctional
unctional elect
electrode
rode pads. Repeat Ste
Step
p 3 to S
Step
tep 9.

Energy Disarming

1. Run the equipment on fully charged battery. Move tthe

he Mode Select kno
knob
b to Manual Defib.

2. Connect th
the
e external paddles to the equipm
equipment
ent and place the paddles on the defibrillator/pacer
defibrillator/pacer analyzer.

3. Set the analyzer to Energy Me

Measurement
asurement mode. IIn
n this case, the energ
energy
y value should
should be displayed
displayed as 0 or blank.
4. Select the energy level to 360J.

5. Charge the equipment.

6. Verify that the charge tone is issued during charging.

7. Press the “Disarm” soft ke

key
y to d
discharge
ischarge the energy internally.

8. Verify tthat
hat a prom
prompt
pt “Charge Removed” appears on the scree
screen
n and the charge done
done tone stops.

9. Verify that tthe

he value measured by the analyzer is 0J or blank.

10. Enter tthe

he Config
Configuration
uration Main menu, sele
select
ct [Manual
[Manual Therapy Setup]
Setup] and set [Time
[Time to Auto Disarm]
Disarm] to [60s
[60s].
].

11. Exit “Configu

“Configuration
ration Manage
Management”.
ment”. The equipment restarts au
automatically.
tomatically.

12. Set the analyzer tto

o Energy Measure
Measurement
ment mode. IIn
n this case, the energy va
value
lue should be displayed as 0 or blank.

13. Select the energy

energy level tto
o 360J.
14. Charge the equ
equipment.
ipment. Count time a
after
fter charging is com
completed.
pleted. Verify tthat
hat the prompt “Shock Re
Removed”
moved” appears
on the equipment and the energy measured by the analyzer is 0J or blank after 60 seconds.

15. Use multif

multifunctional
unctional elect
electrode
rode pads. Repeat Ste
Step
p 3 to S
Step
tep 14.
27-8

Synchronous Defibrillation

1. Connect the
the external paddles and ECG cable to the equipment. Place the paddles ECG electrodes on the
defibrillator/pacer
defibrillator/pacer analyzer.

2. Set the analyzer tto

o Time Me
Measurement
asurement Mode and output nor
normal
mal sinus rhy
rhythms,
thms, e.g. amplitude value
value 1mV and HR
60bpm.

3. Enter Configuration Management. In the [Manual Therapy Setup]

Setup] menu, set [Sync
[Sync After Shock] to [On
[On].
].

4. Adjust the energy setting of tthe

he equipment to b
be
e 10J
10J..

5. Press the [Enter Sync]

Sync] soft key to start synchronous defibrillation. If Remote Sync is switched on, press the [Enter
[ Enter
Sync]] soft key and select [Local
Sync [Local]] to start synchronous defibrillation

6. Select Pads as the ECG source and begin charging.

7. When charging
charging finishes, pr
press
ess and hold tthe
he “Shoc
“Shock”
k” button to de
deliver
liver a shock.

8. Verify that synchr

synchronous
onous discharge succeeds and the deliv
delivered
ered en
energy
ergy measured
measured by the analyzer
analyzer is 10J±2J
10J±2J..

9. Verify that
that the delay time of synchro
synchronous
nous defibrillatio
defibrillation
n measure
measured
d by the analyzer is less than 60ms.
60ms.

10. Verify tha

thatt the synchr
synchronous
onous discharge mark appears o
on
n the R wave.

11. Verify that the prompt m

messages
essages are correct during test
testing.
ing.

12. Select lead II as ECG sou

source
rce and perfo
perform
rm charging. R
Repeat
epeat steps 7 tto
o 11.

13. Use mult

multifunctional
ifunctional elect
electrode
rode pads. Repeat ste
steps
ps 2 to 12.

27.3.8 Pacing Test

Te
Test
st tools: defibrillator/pacer
defibrillator/pacer analy
analyzer
zer

1. Run the equipment on fully char

charged
ged batte
battery.
ry. Move the Mode Select knob to Pacer. Select Fixed
Fixed mode
mode....

2. Connect the pads cable to the eq

equipment
uipment and properly plac
place
e the pads on the defibrillator/pac
defibrillator/pacer
er analyzer
analyzer..

3. Set the analyzer

analyzer tto
o Pacing Measurement mode. Use te
test
st load of 50Ω.

4. On the equipment, set [Pacer rate]

rate] to [70ppm
[70ppm]] and [Pacer
[Pacer Output]
Output] to [30mA
[30mA].
].

5. Press the [Start Pacing]

Pacing] soft key. Verify that the pacer rate measured by the analyzer is 70 ppm±1ppm and the
pacer output measured is 30 mA±5mA.

6. Press the [Stop Pacing]

Pacing] soft key, and then set [Pacer
[Pacer rate]
rate] to [170ppm
[170ppm]] and [Pacer
[Pacer Output]
Output] to [200mA
[200mA].
].

7. Press the [Start Pacing]

Pacing] soft key. Verify that the pacer rate measured by the analyzer is 170 ppm±2ppm, and the
measured current is 200 mA±10mA.

27.3.9 Peforming Testing in Installation Mode

You can test some monitoring modules, view software version and format storage card.by accessing the Installation
Mode.

27.3.9.1 Password for Installation Mode

 27.3.9.1 Password for Installation Mode

Accessing installation mode is password protected. The required password is set to 888888 before the equipment leaves
the factory.

27-9

27.3.9.2 Accessing Installation Mode

You can access Installation Mode while operating in the Monitor, Manual Defib or Pacer mode. Patient monitoring and
therapy automatically
automatically end when you enter Installation Mode.

To enter Installation Mode, pre

press
ss the Main Menu but
button
ton on the fr
front
ont panel, and then select [[Others >>]
Others >>] → [Installation
>>]
Mode >>] → ent
enter
er the
the re
requi
quire
red
d pass
passwo
word
rd.. The Installation Mode Main menu pops up as shown below.

27.3.9.3 NIBP Accuracy Test

The NIBP accuracy

accuracy test is rrequired
equired at least once every two years or w
whenever
henever yyou
ou doubt the N
NIBP
IBP reading.
reading.

Tools
Tools requir
required:
ed:

 T-shape connector
connector

 Tubing

 Balloon pump

 Metal Vessel, volume 500±25 ml

 Calibrated manometer for reference, accuracy superior to 1 mmHg

 27-10

Follow this procedure to perform the accuracy test:

1. Connect the equipment as shown below.

Manometer
Defibrillator/monitor
Connector for Tubing
NIBP cuff

Balloon pump Metal vessel

2. Before inflation,
inflation, the re
reading
ading of the manom
manometer
eter shou
should
ld be 0. If not, disconnect
disconnect the airway and reconnect it until the
readings is 0.

3. NIBP]→ [Start Accuracy Test].

In the Installation Mode Main menu, select [Maintain NIBP] Test].

4. Compare the value of manom

manometer
eter with the value displayed on the equipm
equipment’s
ent’s screen. The difference
difference should be no
greater than 3 mmHg.

5. Raise the pressure in the m

metal
etal vessel to 50 mm
mmHg
Hg with the balloon pump. Repeat
Repeat steps 3 and 4.

6. Raise the pressure in the m

metal
etal vessel to 200 mm
mmHg
Hg with the balloon pump. Repeat steps 3 and 4.

When the accuracy test is completed, the result will be displayed.

If the difference between the values of the manometer and defibrillator/monitor is greater than 3 mmHg, contact your
service personnel.

When you select the [Start

[ Start Accuracy Test]
Test] button, it turns to be [Stop
[ Stop Accuracy Test].
Test]. Select [Stop
[Stop Accuracy Test],
Test],
accuracy test stops and the button turns to be [[Start Test] again.
Start Accuracy Test]

27.3.9.4 NIBP Leakage Test

The NIBP leakage test checks tthe

he integrity of the system and of the v
valve.
alve. It is rrequired
equired at
at least once e
every
very two years
years or
whenever you doubt the NIBP reading.

Tools
Tools require
required:
d:

 An adult cuff

 An air tubing

 A correct sized cylinder

Follow this procedure to perform the leakage test:

1. Set the patient category to [Adu].

Adu].
 2. Connect the cuff to the equipment’s NIBP connector.

27-11

3. Wrap the cuff around the cylinder as shown below.

Defibrillator/monitor Cylinder

Connector for NIBP Tubing Cuff

cuff

4. NIBP]]→ [Start Leakage Test].

In the Installation Mode Main menu, select [Maintain NIBP Test].

After about 20 seconds, the equipment automatically deflates.

deflates. This means the leakage
leak age test is started.

When the accuracy test is completed

completed,, the result will be displayed. If the message “NIBP Pneumatic Leak” is displayed, it
indicates that the NIBP airway may have leakages. Check the tubing and connections for leakages, and then perform a
leakage test again.
If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.

When you select the [Start

[ Start Leakage Test]
Test] button, it turns to be [Stop
[ Stop Leakage Test].
Test]. Select [Stop
[Stop Leakage Test],
Test],
leakage test stops and the button turns to be [Start
[Start Leakage Test
est]] again.

27.3.9.5 Calibrating CO2 Sensor

For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a calibration should be performed

per formed once a year or when the readings go
far beyond the range.

Tools
Tools requir
required:
ed:

 Gas cylinder, with 4%, 5% or 6% of CO2.

 T-shape connector
connector

 Tubing

For sidestream CO2 module, zeroing is required before calibration. Enter the CO 2 Setup menu and select [Zero
[Zero]] to
perform zeroing.

To calibrate the CO2 module, follow this procedure:

1. Make sure that the CO2 module has been warmed up or started up.

2. Connect the gas cylinder with the tubing using a T-shape co

connector
nnector as shown below
below.. Check the airway and make
sure there are no leaks.

3. Access the [Maintain CO2]

CO2] menu. To do so, press the Menu key on the equipment’s front panel. Select [Others>>
[ Others>>]]
→[Installation Mode>>]
Mode>>] →enter the required password→ [Maintain CO2].
CO2].
 27-12

Open to the air

Tubing
Gas valve
Defibrillator
/monitor

Gas cylinder

4. Vent the tubing to the CO2 by opening the gas valve.

5. In the [Maintain CO2]

CO2] menu, select a CO2 value equal to the vented CO2 concentration.

6. In the [Calibrate CO2]

CO2] menu, the measured CO2 concentration is displayed. Wait till the measured CO2
concentration
concentration becomes stable, and then select [[Calibrate
Calibrate]] to start CO2 calibrate.

The message [Calibration Completed!]

Completed!] is displayed after a successful calibration. If the calibration failed, the prompt
[Calibration Failed!]
Failed!] will be displayed. In this case, perform another calibration.

27.3.9.6 Checking Version Information

To view version information, se

select
lect [[Version
Version]] in the Installation Mode Main menu. In the popup menu, you can view
system software version and module software version.

27.3.9.7 Formatting Storage Card

You can format the storage card if data in the card is useless, or if the card has a failure. To format the storage card, select
[Format Data Card]
Card] → [Format
Format]] through the Installation Mode Main menu. Then a dialog box pops up as shown below:

If storage card is formatted successfully, a prompt “Formatting is completed!” appears. If there is a failure, the system
stops formatting and present a prompt “Formatting fails!”. Contact the service personnel if formatting fails for 3 times”.

27.3.9.8 Wireless Transmission Test

After installing the wireless transmission module, you have to send a test page to check if wireless transmission function
works properly.
 27-13

To send a test page,

page, select [[Test Transmission] through the Installation Mode Main menu. Then a menu pops
Test Wireless Transmission]
up as shown below:

Enter the destination site and correspond

corresponding
ing fax number
number.. Select [Transmit Test Page]
Page] to send a test page. The wireless
transmission function works properly if the destination fax machine receives a test page successfully
successfully..

Caution

 Data transmission via wireless transmission module may sometimes be unreliable. A strong signal and
stationary transmission will improve the transmission
tra nsmission success rate.

 Periodically test your equipment transmission function to ensure that the equipment and
an d transmission
accessories are ready for use.

27.3.10 NIBP Overpressure Protection Test

We recommend this test to be carried out once every year. The guidelines for completing this test are as follows:

1. Open the equipment’s enclosure, rremove

emove tthe
he multi-param
multi-parameter
eter monit
monitoring
oring modu
module
le (M51A m
module),
odule), disc
disconnect
onnect the
air tube from the pressure measuring sensor (component U26 on the digital board), and then block the tube.

2. Connect the NIBP cuff.

3. Press the NIBP hard key on the equipm

equipment’s
ent’s front panel to sta
start
rt NIBP m
measurement.
easurement. When the pressure e
exceeds
xceeds the
hardware overpressure
overpressure protection value (300 to 330mmHg), verify that the valve opens to release the air and the
alarm “NIBP Cuff Overpress” is shown on the screen.

The test is passed

passed if you he
hear
ar the valve discharge the gas prope
properly
rly and the “NIBP Cuff Ov
Overpress”
erpress” alarm is given.
given.
Otherwise, contact the service personnel.

27.3.11 Electrical Safety Tests

For details about Electrical Safety Tests, refer to Appendix E Electrical Safety Inspection.
Inspection.
 27-14

28 Accessories

WARNING
 Use accessories specified in this chapter. Using other accessories may cause damage to the equipment or
not meet the claimed specifications.

 Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of contamination and affect
the measurement accuracy.

 Check the accessories and their packages for any sign of damage. Do not use them if any damage is
detected.

 At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as

a s its accessories, must be disposed of in compliance
with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products to avoid contaminating the environment.

 When using the accessories, consider the accessories’ operating temperature. Refer to corresponding
accessory’s instrution for use for details.

28.1 ECG Accessories

ECG Electrodes

Model Specification Applicable patient PN

31499224 10 pcs/pack Adult 0010-10-12304
2245 50 pcs/pack Pediatri
Pediatricc 9000-10-07469
2258-3 3 pcs/pack Neonate 900E-10-04880

12-pin Trunk Cable

Leadwire Model Compatible Type Applicable PN

supported with patient
Pediatric,
3-lead EV 6202 AHA, IEC Defibrillator-pro
Defibrillator-proof
of 0010-30-42720
neonate
3/5-lead EV 6201 AHA, IEC Defibrillator-pro
Defibrillator-proof
of 0010-30-42719
10-leadwire EV 6203 AHA Defibrillator-proo
Defibrillator-prooff Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42721
10-leadwire EV 6204 IEC Defibrillator-pro
Defibrillator-proof
of 0010-30-42722
 28-1

Lead Sets

3-Electrode Lead Sets

Type Compatible with Model Applicable patient PN Remark
EL6302A 0010-30-42725 /
Adult, pediatric
EL6304A 0010-30-42732 Long
IEC
EL6306A Neonate 0010-30-42897 /
EL6308A Pediatric 0010-30-42899 /
Clip
EL6301A 0010-30-42726 /
Adult, pediatric
EL6303A 0010-30-42731 Long
AHA
EL6305A Neonate 0010-30-42896 /
EL6307A Pediatric 0010-30-42898 /
EL6302B Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42733 /
IEC
EL6308B Pediatric 0010-30-42901 /
Snap
EL6301B Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42734 /
AHA
EL6307B Pediatric 0010-30-42900 /

5-Electrode Lead Sets

Type Compatible with Model Applicable patient PN Remark
IEC EL6502A 0010-30-42728 /
IEC EL6504A 0010-30-42730 Long
Clip
AHA EL6501A 0010-30-42727 /
Adult, pediatric
AHA EL6503A 0010-30-42729 Long
IEC EL6502B 0010-30-42736 /
Snap
AHA EL6501B 0010-30-42735 /

10-Electrode Lead Sets

Type Compatible with Model Applicable patient Part No. Remark
EL6802A 0010-30-42903 Limb
IEC
EL6804A 0010-30-42905 Chest
Clip Adult, pediatric
EL6801A 0010-30-42902 Limb
AHA
EL6803A 0010-30-42904 Chest
EL6802B 0010-30-42907 Limb
IEC
EL6804B 0010-30-42909 Chest
Snap Adult, pediatric
EL6801B 0010-30-42906 Limb
AHA
EL6803B 0010-30-42908 Chest

Adapting Cable

Description Compatible with Applicable patient PN

12-pin to 6 pin connector AHA, IEC Adult, pediatric, neonate 0010-30-43054
 28-2

28.2 SpO2 Accessories

Extension Cables

Module type Applicable patient PN Remark

Mindray SpO2 module 0010-20-42710 /
040-000332-00 8 pins, purple connector
Masimo SpO2 module Adult, pediatric, neonate
0010-30-42738 7 pins, white connector
Nellcor SpO2 module 0010-20-42712 /

SpO2 Sensors

The SpO2 sensor material that patients or other staff will come into contact with have undertaken the bio-compatibility
test and is verified to be in compliance with ISO 10993-1.

Mindray SpO2 module

Type Model Applicable patient PN

MAX-A Adult (>30 kg) 0010-10-12202

MAX-P Pediatric (10 to 50 kg) 0010-10-12203
Disposable
MAX-I Infant (3 to 20 kg) 0010-10-12204
MAX-N Neonate (<3 kg), Adult (>40 kg) 0010-10-12205
520A Adult 520A-30-64101
Single patient 520P Pediatric 520P-30-64201
use 520I Infant 520I-30-64301
520N Neonate 520N-30-64401
DS-100A Adult 9000-10-05161
OXI-P/I Pediatric
Pediatric,, infant 9000-10-07308
OXI-A/N Adult, neonate 9000-10-07336
Adult, pediatric, neonate
Reusable 518B (Multi-sites) 518B-30-72107

512E 512E-30-90390
Adult (Finger type)
512F 512F-30-28263
512G 512G-30-90607
Pediatric (Finger type)
512H 512H-30-79061
 28-3

Masimo SpO2 Module

Type Model Applicable patient PN Remark
Pediatric, neonate
FPS-1901 0010-10-42626 LNCS-NeoPt-L
(wrap type)
FPS-1862 Neonate (wrap type) 0010-10-42627 LNCS-Neo-L
Disposable
FPS-1861 Infant (wrap type) 0010-10-42628 LNCS-Inf-L
FPS-1860 Pediatric (wrap type) 0010-10-42629 LNCS-Pdt
FPS-1859 Adult (wrap type)
Adult 0010-10-42630 LNCS-Adt
FPS-1863 Adult (finger clip) 0010-10-42600 LNCS DC-I
Reusable FPS-1864 Pediatric (finger clip) 0010-10-42634 LNCS-DCIP
2258 Adult, pediatric, neonate 0010-10-43016 LNCS YI

Nellcor SpO2 Module

Type Model Applicable patient PN
MAX-A Adult (>30 kg) 0010-10-12202
MAX-P Pediatric (10 to 50 kg) 0010-10-12203
Disposable
MAX-I Infant (3 to 20 kg) 0010-10-12204
MAX-N Neonate (<3 kg), Adult (>40 kg) 0010-10-12205
DS-100A Adult 9000-10-05161
Reusable OXI-P/I Pediatric, infant 9000-10-07308
OXI-A/N Adult, neonate 9000-10-07336

Wavelength of Mindray 518B, 512E, 512F, 512G and 512H SpO2 sensors: red light 660 nm, infrared light 905 nm.
Wavelength
Wavelength of Masimo SpO2 sensors: red light: 660 nm, infrared light: 940 nm.
Wavelength of Nellcor SpO2 sensors: red light: 660 nm, infrared light: 890 nm.
The maximum
maximum photic outpu
outputt consumption of the sensor is less than 18 mW
mW..
The information
information about the waveleng
wavelength
th range and maximum pho
photic
tic output co
consumption
nsumption can be especially useful
useful to
clinicians, for example, clinicians performing photodynamic therapy.
therapy.

28.3 NIBP Accessories

Tubing

Type Applicable patient PN

Adult, pediatric 6200-30-09688
Reusable
Neonate 6200-30-11560
 28-4

Cuff

Applicable Limb Circumference Bladder

Type Model Applied site PN
patient (cm) Width (cm)
R
e CM1201 Infant 10 to 19 9.2 0010-30-12157
u
s
a CM1202 Pediatric 18 to 26 12.2 0010-30-12158
b
l
e
CM1203 Adult Upper arm 24 to 35 15.1 0010-30-12159
CM1204 Large adult 33 to 47 18.3 0010-30-12160
CM1205 Adult Thigh 46 to 66 22.5 0010-30-12161
S
in CM1500A 3.1 to 5.7 2.2 001B-30-70692
g
le
p CM1500B 4.3 to 8 2.9 001B-30-70693
a Neonate
ite CM1500C 5.8 to 10.9 3.8 001B-30-70694
n
t
CM1500D 7.1 to 13.1 4.8 001B-30-70695
Upper arm
CM1501 Infant 10 to 19 7.2 001B-30-70697
CM1502 Pediatr
Pediatric
ic 18 to 26 9.8 001B-30-70698
CM1503 Adult 25 to 35 13.1 001B-30-70699
CM1504 Large adult 33 to 47 16.5 001B-30-70700

CM1505 Adult Thigh 46 to 66 20.5 001B-30-70701

28.4 Temp Accessories

Extension Cable

Type Model Applicable Temp probe PN

Reusable MR420B MR411, MR412 0011-30-37391

Temp Probes

Type Model Applicable patient Application site PN

MR401B Esophageal/Rectall
Esophageal/Recta 0011-30-37392
Adult
MR403B Skin 0011-30-37393
Reusable
MR402B Esophageal/Rectall
Esophageal/Recta 0011-30-37394
Pediatric, neonate
MR404B Skin 0011-30-37395
MR411 Esophageal/Rectal
Esophageal/Rectal 0011-30-37398
Disposable Adult, pediatric, neonate
MR412 Skin 0011-30-37397

Adapting Cable

Description Applicable patient PN

Temp adapting cable Adult, pediatric
pediatric,, neonate 0010-30-43056
 28-5

28.5 IBP/ICP Accessories

IBP accessory kit Description PN
6800-30-50876 12-pin IBP cable set 001C-30-70759
(Hospira) Disposable IBP transducer 0010-10-42638

IBP transducer holder M90-000133---

Steady Rest for IBP Transducer and Clamp M90-000134---
6800-30-50877 12-pin IBP cable set 001C-30-70757
(BD) Disposable IBP transducer 6000-10-02107
Transducer/Manifold mount 0010-10-12156
IBP adapter cable 0010-20-42795

ICP accessory kit Description PN

6800-30-51134 12-pin ICP cable set 0010-30-42742
ICP sensor 0010-10-12151

28.6 CO2 Accessories

Sidestream CO2 Module

Description Applicable patient Remark PN

Watertrap Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10530
Reusable
Watertrap Neonate 9200-10-10574
Sampling line Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10533
Sampling line Neonate (2.5m) 9200-10-10555
Nasal sampling line Adult Disposable M02A-10-25937
Nasal sampling line Pediatric M02A-10-25938
Nasal sampling line Infant M02B-10-64509

Airway adapter Adult, pediatric Straight 9000-10-07486

Microstream CO2 Module

Disposable Airway Sampling Line

Model Applicable patient Remark PN
XS04620 / 0010-10-42560
XS04624 Humidified 0010-10-42561
Adult, pediatric
007768 Long 0010-10-42563
007737 Long, humidified 0010-10-42564
006324 Humidified 0010-10-42562
Infant, neonate
007738 Long, humidified 0010-10-42565
 28-6

Disposable Nasal Sampling Line

Model Applicable patient Remark PN
009818 / 0010-10-42566
009822 Adult, intermedia
intermediate
te Plus O2 0010-10-42568
009826 Long, plus O2 0010-10-42570

008174 / 0010-10-42577
008177 Adult Humidified 0010-10-42572
008180 Humidified, plus O2 0010-10-42575
007266 / 0010-10-42567
008175 / 0010-10-42578
008178 Humidified 0010-10-42573
Pediatric
008181 Humidified, plus O2 0010-10-42576
007269 Plus O2 0010-10-42569
007743 Long, plus O2 0010-10-42571
008179 Infant, neonate Humidified 0010-10-42574

28.7 Therapy Accessories

Description Model Applicable patient Remark PN
External paddles MR6601 Adult, pediatric Reusable 0651-30-77001
Multifunction MR60 Adult 0651-30-77007
Disposable (5 sets/pack)
electrode pads MR61 Pediatric 0651-30-77008
Pads cable MR6701 / Reusable 0651-20-77031
Conductive gel 15-25 / Consumable 0000-10-10775
iD-Electrode iD1100 Adult, pediatric Disposable (5 pieces/pack) 115-009756-00
iD1200 Adult 115-009754-00
iD-Paddles Disposable
iD1300 Pediatric 115-009755-00

iD-cable Mindray iD-CM / Reusable 115-009757-00

 28-7

28.8 Miscellaneous
Description Model PN

Rechargeable lithium ion battery LI34I001A 0651-30-77120

Te
Test
st load MR6905 040-000413-00
Wireless transmission module kit / 115-006297-00
Y-cable / 009-000829-00
Synchronous
Synchronous defibrillation input cable / 0651-20-77046

Analog output cable / 0651-20-77122

Grounding cable UL1015/14AWG

UL1015/14AWG 1000-21-00122

DC/AC adapter / 0010-30-12471

Patient data management

management software kit / 0651-30-77145
Vehicle mount kit / 115-005061-00
Carrying case / 0651-30-77111
Charger Station kit (International) 115-009187-00
Charger Station kit (US) 115-009188-00
Charger Station kit (Indian) 115-009189-00
BatteryFeed 20
Charger Station kit (EU) 115-009190-00
Charger Station kit (Brazilian) 115-009191-00
Charger Station kit (UK) 115-009192-00
 28-8

A Specifications

A.1 General Specifications

Class I, equipment energiz
energized
ed from an external and internal electrical power source.
source.
Type of
of protection against
If you suspect the integrity of the external protective earthing or the protective earthing
electrical shock
wire, you should run the equipment on internal electrical power supply (battery).

Degree of protection against Type BF defibrillation pr

proof
oof for C
CO
O2 monitoring and external defibrillation.

electric shock Type

Type CF defibrillation proof for ECG, TEMP/SpO2/IBP, NIBP and internal defibrillation.

Mode of operation Continuous

Degree of protection against
harmful ingress of solid
Degree of protection against
harmful ingress of water
IP4X
IPX4 (when running on battery)
IPX1 (when running on AC power supply)

Degree of mobility Portable

Size
Without external paddles 295×218×279 mm
With external paddles 295×218×323 mm

Weight
Main Unit 5.6 kg

Battery package (each) 0.75 kg

External paddle set 0.83 kg

Display
Type TFT Color LCD
LCD
Size 8.4 inch
Resolution 800×600 pixels
Viewed waveforms Max. 4
Wave viewing time Max. 16s (ECG)

Equipment connectors
USB connector Connects USB flash memory
Multifunctional connector Connects a cable for analog output or a cable for defibrillator synchronizati
synchronization.
on.
VGA connector Connects TFT display of medical grade.
RJ45 connector Connects standard network cable.
 A-1

Audio Indicator

Gives alarm tones (45 to 85 dB), key tones, QRS tones;

Speaker Supports PITCH TONE and multi-level tone modulation;
Alarm tones comply with IEC60601-1-8.

Multifunctional connector
Meets the requirements of EN60601-1 for short-circuit
short- circuit protection and leakage
Standard
current
Output impedance Typically 50Ω
ECG Analog Output
Diagnostic mode: 0.05 to 100 Hz
Bandwidth (-3 dB; refere
reference
nce
Monitor mode: 0.5 to 40 Hz
frequency: 10 Hz)
Therapy mode:
mode: 1 to 20 Hz
Max transmission delay 25 ms (in diagnostic mode, and with Notch off
off))
Sensitivity 1 V/mV ±5%
PACE
PACE rejection/e
rejection/enhancement
nhancement No pace rejection or enhancement
Synchronous input
Input signal range 0 to 5V (TTL level)
Input impedance ≥10 kΩ
Pulse width ＞5 ms

A.2 Defibrillator Specifications

Defibrillation mode
Defibrillation wavefo
waveform
rm
Defibrillation electrodes
Controls and indicators on external
paddles
Manual defib, synchronous cardiove
cardioversion,
rsion, AED
Biphasic truncated exponential (BTE) waveform,
waveform, auto-compensation according to
patient impedance
External paddle set coming with pediatric paddles included, multifunction
electrode pads.
Charge button, Shock buttons, Energy Select buttons and charge done indicator

Range of selected energy

External defibrillation 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 70, 100, 150, 170, 200, 300, 360 J

Patient impedance range

External defibrillation 20 to 200 Ω
 A-2

360 J defibrillation waveform into impedance of 25Ω, 50Ω, 75Ω, 100Ω, 125Ω, 150Ω, 175Ω

)
(V
e
g
tla
o
V

Time (ms)

Selected energy accuracy

Impedance
25Ω 50Ω 75Ω 100Ω 125Ω 150Ω 175Ω Accuracy
Energy
1J 1 1 1 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.8 ±2J
2J 2 2 2 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 ±2J
3J 2.9 3 2.9 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.4 ±2J
4J 3.9 4 3.9 3.7 3.6 3.4 3.2 ±2J
5J 4.9 5 4.9 4.7 4.5 4.3 4.1 ±2J
6J 5.8 6 5.8 5.6 5.3 5.1 4.9 ±2J
7J 6.8 7 6.8 6.6 6.3 6 5.7 ±2J
8J 7.8 8 7.8 7.4 7.1 6.8 6.5 ±2J
9J 8.8 9 8.8 8.4 8 7.7 7.3 ±2J
10 J 9.7 10 9.7 9.3 8.9 8.5 8.1 ±2J
15 J 15 15 15 14 13 13 12 ±15%
20 J 20 20 20 19 18 17 16 ±15%
30 J 29 30 29 28 27 25 24 ±15%
50 J 49 50 49 47 45 43 41 ±15%
70 J 68 70 68 65 62 60 57 ±15%
100 J 97 100 97 93 89 85 81 ±15%
150 J 146 150 146 140 134 128 122 ±15%
170 J 166 170 166 159 151 145 138 ±15%
200 J 195 200 195 187 178 170 163 ±15%
 300 J 292 300 292 280 267 255 244 ±15%
360 J 351 360 350 336 321 306 293 ±15%

A-3

Charge time (Note: at 20 C of amb

ambient
ient temperature)
Manual Defib AED
From initiation of
From initial power From initial power on to
Charge time rhythm analysis to
on to charge done charge done
charge done

200J 360J 200J 360J 200J 360J 200J 360J

With a new, fully
<5 s <8 s <11 s <14 s <16 s <21 s <21 s <26 s
charged battery
With a new, fully
charged battery,
<6 s <9 s <12 s <15 s <17 s <22 s <23 s <27 s
depleted by 15 360 J
discharges

With 90% to 100% rated

<8 s <12 s <14 s <18 s <19 s <23 s <25 s <28 s
mains voltage

AC mains: 100 to 240 VAC (±10%

(±10%))

Synchronized discharge delay

Local synchronized discharge delay < 60ms (from the peak of R-wave)
Remote synchroniz
synchronized
ed dischar
discharge
ge dela
delay
y < 25ms (from the rise edge o
off synchro
synchronous
nous signal)

AED
Energy level: 100 to 360J, configurable;
Shock series Shocks: 1, 2, 3, configurable;
Meeting AHA guidelines 2010 by default.
Shockable rhythm VF,
VF, VT (HR>150bpm and QRS width>120ms)

AED ECG Analysis Performance

Rhythm Class Performance requirement Remark

Shockable rhythm
Ventricular
Ventricular fibrillation
Shockable rhythm
Ventricular tachycardia
Non-shockable rhythm
Normal sinus rhythm
Non-shockable rhythm
Asystole
Non-shockable rhythm
Sensitivity > 90% Meets IEC 60601-2-4 and AAMI DF80
requirement and AHA recommendation
Sensitivity > 75% Meets IEC 60601-2-4 and AAMI DF80
requirement and AHA recommendation
Specificity > 99% Meets IEC 60601-2-4 and AAMI DF80
requirement and AHA recommendation
Specificity > 95% Meets IEC 60601-2-4 and AAMI DF80
requirement and AHA recommendation
Specificity > 95% Meets IEC 60601-2-4 and AAMI DF80
All other non-shockable rhythms requirement and AHA recommendation

A-4

A.3 Pacer Specifications

Pacing mode Demand, fixed
Monophasic square wave pulse
Output waveform pulse width 20 ms
Accuracy: ±5%

40ppm to 170ppm
Pacing rate Accuracy: ±1.5%
Resolution: 5 ppm
0mA to 200mA,
Pacing output Accuracy: ±5% or ±5mA, whichever is greater
Resolution: 5mA
200 to 300 ms (depending on pacing rate)
Refractory period
Accuracy: ±3%
4:1 pacing Pacing pulse frequency reduced by factor of 4 when this function is activated.
Output protection The equipment has no sign of damage after defibrillation-proof
defibrillation-proof test.

A.4 Monitor Specifications

ECG

3-lead ECG cable, 5-lead ECG cable, 12-lead ECG cable, paddles or multifunction
Patient connection
electrode pads
Defibrillation electrodes: pads/paddles
3-lead ECG set: I, II, III
ECG inputs
5-lead ECG set: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V,
12-lead ECG set: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6
Gain 2.5 mm/mV (×0.25), 5 mm/mV (×0.5), 10 mm/mV (×1), 20 mm/mV (×2), 40mm/mV (×4)
Paper speed 6.25mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Digital sampling 500 samples/seco
samples/second/channel
nd/channel
Diagnostic mode: 0.05 to 150 Hz
Bandwidth
Monitor mode: 0.5 to 40 Hz
(-3dB, ECG lead set)
Therapy mode:
mode: 1 to 20 Hz
Bandwidth (-3dB, defibrillation
Therapy mode:
mode: 1 to 20 Hz
electrodes)
Diagnostic mode: >90 dB
Common mode rejection
Monitor mode: >105 dB
(ECG lead set)
Therapy mode:
mode: >105 dB
Common mode rejection
Therapy mode:
mode: >90 dB
(defibrillation electrodes)
50/60Hz,
 Notch filter In Monitor and Therapy mode: notch filter turns on automatically
In Diagnostic mode: notch filter is turned on manually
ECG signal range ±8mV
Electrode offset potential ±500mV

A-5

ECG

tolerance
Neonate 15 to 350 bpm
HR measurement range Pediatric 15 to 350 bpm
Adult 15 to 300 bpm
HR accuracy ±1% or ±1bpm, which ever is greater
HR resolution 1 bpm
Measuring electrode: <0.1 μA
Lead-off detection current
Drive electrode: <1 μA
Baseline recove
recovery
ry time <5 s (after defibrillation, in monitor mode and therapy mode)
When the test is performed based on part 4.1.2.1 c) of ANSI/AAMI EC 13-2002, the heart
Tall T-wa
T-wave
ve rejection capability rate meter will reject all 100 ms QRS complexe
complexess with less than 1.2 mV of amplitude, and
T waves with
with T
T-wave
-wave in
interval
terval of 180 ms and tthose
hose with Q-T
Q-T interval of 350 m
ms.
s.

Meets the requirements

requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.2.
4.1.2.11 e). The heart rate
reading after 20 seconds of stabilization is:

Ventricular bigeminy (3a): 80±1 bpm

Response to irregular rhythm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy (3b): 60±1 bpm

Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy (3c): 120±1 bpm

Bidirectional systoles (3d): 90±2 bpm
Meets requirements
requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.2.1 f ).
Response to change in heart rate From 80 to 120 bpm: less than 11 s;
From 80 to 40 bpm: less than 11 s;
Meets the requirements
requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.2.1 g).
Waveform
4ah - range: 11 s
4a - range: 11 s
Time to alarm
alarm for tach
tachycardia
ycardia
4ad - range: 11 s
4bh - range: 11 s
4b - range: 11 s

Heart rate averaging
4bd - range: 11 s
requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 d）of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002, the
In compliance with the requirements
following method is used:
If the last 3 consecutive RR intervals are greater than 1200 ms, the 4 most recent RR
intervals are averaged to compute the HR. Otherwise, heart rate is computed by
subtracting the maximum and minimum ones from the most recent 12 RR intervals
and then averaging them.
The HR value displayed o
on
n the monitor screen is up
updated
dated every
every second.

Asystole, V-Fib/V-Tach, Vtac, Vent. Brady, Extreme Tachy, Extreme Brady, PVCs/min, PVC,
Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications Couplet, VT>2, Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, PNP, PNC, Vent.
Rhythm, Multif. PVC, Nonsus. Vtac, Pause, Irr. Rhythm
 A-6

Pace Pulse
Pace pulses meeting the following conditions are labelled with a PACE marker:
Amplitude: ±2 to ±700 mV
Pace pulse markers
Width: 0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time: 10 to 100 µs

Meets the requirements

requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.4.1 and 4.1.4.3. The
following pulses will be rejected
rejected..
Amplitude: ±2 to ±700 mV
Pace pulse rejection
Width: 0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time: 10 to 100 µs
Minimum input slew rate: 10 V/s RTI

Resp
Technique
Technique Trans-thor
Trans-thoracic
acic impedance
Adult: 0 to 120 rpm
Measurement range
Pediatric, neonate 0 to 150 rpm
7 to 150 rpm: ±2 rpm or ±2%, whichever is greater.
Accuracy
0 to 6 rpm: Not specified
Respiration excitation waveform <300 µA, sinusoid, 62.8 kHz (±10%)
Detectable respiration impedance
0.3 to 5Ω
range
Reference
Reference impedance range 200 to 2500Ω, using ECG cable with 1 kΩ resistor
Difference
Difference input impedance >2.5 MΩ
Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s

Mindray SpO2 Module

*Measurement
*Measurement accuracy verification: The SpO2 accuracy has been verified in human experiments by comparing with arterial
blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurements are statistically distributed and about
two-thirds of the measurements are expected to come within the specified accuracy range compared to CO-oximeter
measurements.
Measurement range 0 to 100%
Resolution 1%
70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)
Accuracy
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)
0% to 69%: Not specified
Refreshing rate 1s
7 s (When the sensitivity is set to High)
 SpO2 averaging time 9 s (When the sensitivity is set to Medium)
11 s (When the sensitivity is set to Low)
Data update period 7 to 9 s (When the sensitivity is set to High)

A-7

PR
Measurement range 20 to 254 bpm
±3 bpm (measured without motion)
Accuracy
±5 bpm (measured with motion)

Masimo SpO2 Module

Measurement range 1 to 100%
Resolution 1%
70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)
Accuracy
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)
1% to 69%: Not specified
Refreshing rate 1s
SpO2 averaging time 2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s
Pulse amplitude: >0.02%
Low perfusion conditions
Light penetration: >5%
Low perfusion SpO2
accuracy ±2%

PR
Measurement range 25 to 240 bpm
±3 bpm (measured without motion)
Accuracy
±5 bpm (measured with motion)
Low perfusion PR accuracy ±3 bpm

Nellcor SpO2 Module

Measurementt range
Measuremen 0 to 100%
Resolution 1%
Sensor Range Accuracy*

MAX-A, MAX-AL, MAX-N 70 to 100% ±2%

MAX-P,, MAX-I, MAX-FAST
MAX-P 0% to 69% Not specified
OxiCliq A, OxiCliq N 70 to 100% ±2.5%
Accuracy OxiCliq P, OxiCliq I 0% to 69% Not specified
70 to 100% ±3%
D-YS, DS-100A, OXI-A/N, OXI-P/I
0% to 69% Not specified
70 to 100% ±3.5%
MAX-R, D-YSE, D-YSPD
0% to 69% Not specified

Refreshing rate 1s

PR
Measurementt range
Measuremen 20 to 300 bpm
Accuracy ±3 bpm (20 to 250 bpm)
Not specified (251 to 300 bpm)

A-8

Temp
Parameters
Parameters Max. 2 channels. T1, T2, TD
Measurement range 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
Accuracy ±0.1 °C or ±0.2 °F (without considering probe error)
Resolution 0.1 °C
Minimum time for accurate Body surface: <100 s

measurement Body cavity: <80 s

NIBP
Standards Meet standards of EN60601-2-30/IEC60601-2-30, EN1060-1, EN1060-3, EN1060-4 and SP10
Technique
Technique Oscillometry
Mode of operation Manual, Auto and STA
STAT
T
Static pressure measurement
0kPa to 40.0kPa (0mmHg to 300mmHg)
range
Static pressure measurement
±0.4kPa (±3mmHg)
accuracy
120s for adult and pediatric patients
Maximum measurement time
90s for neonatal patients

Adult Pediatric Neonate

mmHg 40 to 270 40 to 200 40 to 135

Systolic
KPa 5.3 to 36.0 5.3 to 26.7 5.3 to 18.0

Measurement range mmHg 10 to 210 10 to 150 10 to 100

Diastolic
KPa 1.3 to 28.0 1.3 to 20.0 1.3 to 13.3

mmHg 20 to 230 20 to 165 20 to 110

Mean
KPa 2.7 to 30.7 2.7 to 22.0 2.7 to 14.7

Setting range Default Accuracy

Cuff inflation pressure Adult: 80 to 280 mmHg 160 mmHg

Pediatric 80 to 210 mmHg 140 mmHg 5 mmHg

Neonate 60 to 140 mmHg 90 mmHg

Adult: 297±3 mmHg

Software overpressure
Pediatric: 240±3 mmHg
protection
Neonate: 147±3 mmHg

Max mean error: ±5 mmHg

Measurementt accuracy
Measuremen
Max standard deviation: 8 mmHg
 A-9

IBP
Channels 2
Sensitivity 5 μV/V/mm
μV/V/mmHg
Hg
Measurementt range
Measuremen -6.7 kPa to 40.0 kPa (-50 mmHg to 300mmHg)
±2% or ±1mmHg, whichever is greater
Accuracy
(without considering transducer error)
Operation temperature:
temperature: 15 to 40ºC
IBP sensor temperature range
Storage temperature: -25 to 70ºC

Waveform
Wavefor m label
lab el Art
Art,, Ao, FAP,
FAP, BAP, UAP
UAP,, PA, CVP, CPP
CPP,, LAP, RAP, ICP,
ICP, P1, P2, etc

PR
Measurementt range
Measuremen 25 to 350 bpm
Accuracy ±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater

Microstream CO2 Module

Measurement range 0 to 99 mmHg
0 to 38 mmHg: ±2 mmHg
Accuracy*
39 to 99 mmHg: ±5%×reading + 0.08%× (reading–38 mmHg)
* Accuracy applies for respiration rate up to 80 rpm. For respiration rate above 80 rpm, the accuracy is 4 mmHg or ±12% of
the reading, whichever is greater, for EtCO2 exceeding 18 mmHg. For respiration rate above 60 rpm, the above accuracy can
be achieved by using the humidified sample line for Infant/Neonatal. In the presence of interfering gases, the above accuracy
is maintained to within 4%.
Accuracy drift Meets the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours
Resolution 1mmHg

Flow rate
ml/min
Initialization time 30 s (typical)
2.9 s (typical)

(The response time is the sum of the rise time and the delay time when using a sampling
Response time line of standard length)
Rise time: <190 ms (10% to 90%)
Delay time: 2.7 s (typical)
awRR measureme
measurement
nt range 0 to 150 rpm
0 to 70 rpm: ±1 rpm
awRR accuracy 71 to 120 rpm: ±2 rpm
121 to 150 rpm: ±3 rpm
Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
 A-10

Sidestream CO2 Module

Measurement range 0 to 99 mmHg
0 to 40 mmHg: ±2 mmHg
Accuracy* 41 to 76 mmHg: ±5% × reading
77 to 99 mmHg: ±10% × reading

Accuracy drift Meets the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours.
Resolution 1mmHg
70, 100 ml/min
Flow rate
Accuracy: ±15% of set value, or ±15 ml/min, whichever is greater.
Warm-up time 1 min
Measured with an adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter long neonatal sampling line:
<5.5s@100ml/min
<7s@70ml/min
Response time
Measured with a neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling line:
<3.5s@100ml/min
<4s@70ml/min
awRR measurement range 0 to 120 rpm
awRR accuracy ±2 rpm
Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s

Effect of interference gases on CO2 measurements

Gas Concentration (%) Quantitive effect*
N2O ≤60
Hal ≤4
Sev ≤5 ±1 mmHg
Iso ≤5
Enf ≤5
Des ≤15 ±2 mmHg
Helium Unspecified
Xenon Unspecified
*: means an extra error should be added in case of gas interference when CO2 measurements are performed under
0-40mmHg.
Note: The effect of above mentioned interference gases applies when relevant compensations are switched on and set
correctly.
 A-11

A.5 Power Supply Specifications

Fuse Time-la
Time-lag,
g, 250V, T3.15A
AC power
Line voltage 100 to 240 VAC (±10%)

Current 1.8 to 0.8 A

Frequency
Frequency 50 / 60Hz (±3Hz)
DC Power (with an external DC/AC adapter)
Input voltage 12VDC
Power consumptio
consumptionn 190W

Battery
14.8V/4.5AH, smart lithium ion battery, rechar
rechargeable
geable and free of maintenance,
maintenance, two batteries can be
Battery type
configured
Less than 2 hours to 80% and less than 3 hours to 100% with equipment power off;
Charge time
Less than 6 hours to 80% and less than 9 hours to 100% with equipment power
power on.
Two new
new fully
One new fully charged Te
Testing
sting condition
charged battery
batteries
Without recording, typical ECG monitoring,
≥5 h ≥10 h
LCD brightness set to 1
Monitoring Without recording, all parameters under

Run time ≥3.5 h ≥7 h monitoring, NIBP measurements at

intervals of 15 min, LCD brightness
brightness set to 1

≥200 360J discharges at intervals of one minute,

Defibrillation ≥100 discharges
discharges without recording

50 Ω load impedance,
impedance,
Pacing ≥3 h ≥6 h pacing rate: 80bpm,

pacing output 60mA, without recording

Battery fuel gauge 5 LEDs indicating the current battery charge level
Shutdown delay At least 20 minutes of monitoring and six 360J discharges (after the low battery alarm occurs)

Note: The specifications

specifications above base on a new battery, and at 20ºC.

A.6 Recorder Specifications

Method High-resolution thermal dot array
Number of wavefor
waveforms
ms Max. 4
Paper speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s
Paper width 50 mm, 80mm
Grid lines The operator can choose to print grid lines or not
Reports Real-ti
Real-time
me waveforms, frozen waveforms, tabular trends, 12-lead, user test, auto test, configuration
Charge events, shock events, marked events, auto test report, parameter alarms, ARR alarms, if
Auto record
configured on

A-12

A.7 Alarm Specifications

Alarm Levels High, medium, low level alarms, complying with IEC60601-1-8
Alarm Categories Physiologi
Physiological
cal alarms, technical alarms; Latched alarms and unlatched alarms.
Alarm lamp Independent alarm LED

Parameter
Parameter alarm setting Alarm properties
properties of all available param
parameters
eters can be set simultaneously in the P
Para.
ara. Alarm menu
Auto alarm limits Parameter alarm limits can be automatical
automatically
ly adjusted according to currently measured vital signs

A.8 Data Management Specifications

Data Storage Internal CF card, 1G Bytes
Marking Events 16 types of events, user customized
Event recordin
recording
g Up to 1000 events for each patient.
Waveform storage Up to 24 hours of consecutive ECG waveform
Voice recor
recording
ding Max. 180 minutes in total; max. 60 minutes for each patient
Tabular
Tabular T
Trends
rends Max. 72 h of all measu
measured
red parame
parameters;
ters; resolu
resolution:1
tion:1 min
Data Export Data can be export to a PC through a USB flash memory
Patient archives Up to 100
12-lead ECG 5 sets for each patient

A.9 Wireless Network

AP
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g

Frequency
Frequency range 2.412 to 2.462GHz

China America Canada Europ

Europee Spain France Japan

Operating channel 1-11 10, 11 2

For other countries, please refer to your local law.
Safe distance A circle centering AP with the radius of 10 m

3G
Standards IEEE 802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11n

Frequency range UMTS/WCDMA/HS

UMTS/WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUP
DPA/HSUPA
A 850/190
850/1900/2100
0/2100 MHz
850/900/1900/2100 MHz selectable
Bandwidth HSUPA: 5.76 Mbps
HSDPA: 7.2 Mbps
UMTS: 384 Kbps (DL/UL)
Launch power <24 dBm
 Receiving sensitivity <-109 dBm

A-13

A.10 Environmental Specifications

Operating environment
0 to 45ºC (at least 60 minutes of working time when the temperature reduces from room
Operating temperature temperature to – 20ºC)
(0 to 40ºC for microstream CO2 module, 5 to 35ºC for sidestream CO2 module)

Operating humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensation

Operating altitude -381m to +4575 m (-1250 ft to 15000 ft, or 106.2kPa to 57kPa)

Storage environment

Storage temperature -30 to 70ºC

Storage humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensation
Storage altitude -381m to +4575 m (-1250 ft to 15000 ft, or 106.2kPa to 57kPa)

Shock

Complies with requirements

requirements of 21.102, ISO9919:
Peak acceleration: 1000m/s2 (102g)
Duration: 6ms
Pulse shape: half-sine
Number of shocks: 3 shocks per direction per axis (18 total)

Vibration

Complies with requirements

requirements of 21.102, ISO9919.

Bump

Complies with the requirements of 6.3.4.2, EN1789.

Peak acceleration: 15g

Duration: 6ms
Number of impacts: 1000
Impact direction: vertical impacts are applied when the equipment under test is placed at normal operating position.

Free fall

Complies with the requirements of 6.3.4.3, EN1789.

Drop height: 0.75 m
Number of drops: once for each of the six surfaces
 A-14

B EMC
The equipment
equipment meets the require
requirements
ments of IE
IEC
C 60601-1-2.

NOTE
 Use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified may result in increased emission
and/or decreased electromagnetic immunity of the defibrillator/monitor.

 The equipment or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other devices. If a
adjacent
djacent
or stacked use is necessary, the equipment should be observed to verify normal operation in the
configuration in which it will be used.

 The equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service
according to the EMC information provided below.

 Other devices may affect this monitor even though

t hough they meet the requirements of CISPR.

 When the inputted signal is below the minimum amplitude provided in technical specifications, erroneous
measurements could result.

 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment may affect this equipment.

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions

The equipment
equipment is suitable ffor
or use in the electromag
electromagnetic
netic envir
environment
onment specifie
specified
d below
below.. The customer
customer or the
the user of the
equipment should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The equipment uses RF energy only for its internal function
function..
CISPR 11 Therefore,
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are
are not likely to
cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class B Meet the requirem
requirements
ents of Class B
CISPR 11

Harmonic emissions Class A The equipment

equipment is suitable ffor
or use in all est
establishments,
ablishments,
IEC 60601-1-2 including domestic establishments and those directly
EN 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
Voltage fluctuations/flicker emissions Complies that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
IEC 60601-1-2
EN 61000-3-3
 B-1

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The equipment
equipment is suitable ffor
or use in the electromag
electromagnetic
netic envir
environment
onment specifie
specified
d below
below.. The customer
customer or the user of the
the
equipment should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment -
guidance

Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or

discharge (ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors are covered
IEC 61000-4-2 with synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be
transient/burst lines lines that of a typical commercial
commercial or
(EFT) ±1 kV for input/output lines ±1 kV for input/output lines hospital environme
environment.
nt.
IEC 61000-4-4 (length greater than 3 m) (length greater than 3 m)
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differen
differential
tial mode
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode
Voltage
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) Mains power quality should be
interruptions
interruptions and 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle that of a typical commercial
commercial or
voltage variations on hospital environment.
environment. If the user of
power supply input 40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 40% UT (60% dip in UT) for our product requires continued
lines cycle 5 cycle operation during power mains
IEC 61000-4-11 interruptions, it is recommended
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 70% UT (30% dip in UT) for that our product be powered from
25 cycle 25 cycle an uninterruptible power supply or
a battery.
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for <5% UT (>95% dip in UT)
5 seconds for 5 seconds
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 Hz) magnetic should be at levels characteristic of
field a typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial
commercial or hospital
environment.
Note: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
 B-2

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The equipment
equipment is suitable ffor
or use in the electromag
electromagnetic
netic envir
environment
onment specifi
specified
ed below
below.. The customer
customer or the user of the
the
equipment should assure that it is used in such an environment.

IEC 60601
Immunity test Test level Comp
Complianc
liance
e leve
levell Electromag
Electromagnetic
netic envi
environme
ronment
nt - guidance
guidance
Conduced RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms (V1) Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should
IEC 61000-4-6 150k to 80 MHz be used no closer to any part of the device, including cables,
Outside ISM than the recomm
recommended
ended separation distance calculated from
bandsa the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
transmitter.
Recommended
Recommended separation distance:

⎡ 3 .5 ⎤
d = ⎢ P
10 Vrms 10 Vrms (V2) ⎣ V 1 ⎥⎦
150kHz to ⎡ 12 ⎤
d = ⎢ P
80MHz ⎣ V 2 ⎥⎦
in ISM bandsa ⎡ 12 ⎤
d = ⎢ P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
(for life support ⎣ E 1 ⎥⎦
devices) ⎡ 23 ⎤
d = ⎣⎢ E 1 ⎦⎥ P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Radiated RF 10V/m 10 V/m (E1)
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 where P is the maximum output power rating of the

GHz transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter

transmitter

(for life support manufacturer and d is the recomm

recommended
ended separation

devices) distance in meters (m)b.

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by
20V/m 20 V/m (E2)
an electromagnetic site surveyc, should be less than the
80 MHz to 2.5
compliance level in each frequency range d
GHz
Interference
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked
(
ISO 9919)

with the following symbol: .

Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagne
Electromagnetic
tic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
 B-3

a
The ISM (industrial, scientific,
scientific, and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz; 13.553 MHz
to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
b
Compliance level in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz to 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
are intended to decrease the likelihood that portable/
por table/ mobile communication equipment
equipment could cause interference if it is
inadvertently brought
brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 1
10/3
0/3 is used in calculating the

recommended separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges.

c
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cor
(cellular/cordless)
dless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To
assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered.
If the measured field strength in the location in which the device is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above,
the device should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may
be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the device.
d
Over the frequency ranges 150 kHz to 80 MHz beyond ISM band, field strengths should be less than 3V/m; within ISM
band, field strengths should be less than 10V/m.
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF, Communications Equipment and This
Equipment
The equipment
equipment is intende
intended
d for use in an electrom
electromagnetic
agnetic env
environment
ironment in which radiat
radiated
ed RF disturban
disturbance
ce are ccontrolled.
ontrolled. The

customer or the user of the equipment can help prevent electromagnetic

electromagnetic interfere
interference
nce by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the equipment as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communication equipment.

Rated Maximum Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter (m)

Output power of 150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz in 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Transmitter Watts outside ISM bands ISM bands
(W) ⎡ 3 .5 ⎤ ⎡ 12 ⎤ ⎡ 12 ⎤ ⎡ 23 ⎤
d =⎢ P d = ⎢ P d =⎢ P d =⎢ P
⎣ V 1 ⎥⎦ ⎣ V 2 ⎥⎦ ⎣ E 1 ⎥⎦ ⎣ E 1 ⎥⎦
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.30
10 3.70 3.80 3.80 7.30
100 12.00 12.00 12.00 23.00
For transmitters at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distanced in meters (m) can be
determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W ) according to the transmitter manufacturer
manufacturer..
Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: The ISM (industrial, scientific, and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795 MHz; 13.553
MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
MH z.
Note 3: An additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the recomm
recommended
ended separation distance for transmitters
transmitters in the ISM
frequency bands between 150 kHz to 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz to decrease the likelihood that
portable/ mobile communication equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas.
Note 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromag
Electromagnetic
netic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
C BeneHeart Defibrillator Shift Checklist
Inspect the defibrillator/monitor once every day. Place a “√” in the “Pass/Fail” box as you check the item , or place a “-” if
not applicable. Describe the problem if there is any abnormity.
Equipment Name:
Item
Equipment appearance
Batteries
AC power supply
Recorder paper
Cables/connectors
Cables/connectors
ECG cable set and electrodes
(skip if not in use)
External paddles
(skip if not in use)
Pads cable and pads
(skip if not in use)
Pads cable shock test*
(skip if not in use)
Paddles shock test**
(skip if not in use)
B-4
Serial Number: Department:
Requirements Pass/Fail Description of Abnormity
Clean, no foreign substance, no crack
At least one battery installed, battery
indicator on, and more than 60% of
battery capacity left
AC power supply connected, green AC
indicator on
Present and sufficie
sufficient
nt
Cables not frayed, connectors and pins not
broken or loose
Present. Cables not frayed, connectors and
pins not broken or loose
Cables not frayed, connectors and pins not
broken or loose ,Properly placed in paddle
tray and easily removed
Present,
Present, pads cable not damaged, pads
not expired. Cables not frayed, connectors
and pins not broken or loose
Turn the mode
mode select kno
knob
b to “Manual
Defib”, connect the pads cable and test
load, charge to 200J, and press the
“Shock” button. Then the system prompts
that shock delivered normally. Disconnect
the test load after the test is finished.
Turn the mode se
select
lect knob to “Manual
Defib”, connect the paddle cable and place
the paddles onto the paddle trays, charge
to 10J, and press the “Shock” button. Then
the system prompts that shock delivered
 normally.
Service indicator Off

Checked by: Date:

C-1

*: Perform this test only when automatic selftest is n

not
ot performed using pads cable or when selftest fails.
**: Perform this test only when a
automatic
utomatic selftest is not pe
performed
rformed using paddles o
orr when
when selftest fails.

NOTE

 Remember to disconnect the test load when the test is finished. Otherwise, delay could happen in patient
treatment.
 C-2

D Alarm Messages
This chapter lists only the mo
most
st important phy
physiological
siological and te
technical
chnical alarm me
messages.
ssages. Some messages appearing
appearing on
your equipment may not be included.

In this chapter:

 The “I” column

column indicates how indications of tech
technological
nological alarms ar
are
e cleared aft
after
er the hardkey or [Audio

Pause] softkey is pressed: “A” means all alarm indications are cleared; “B” indicates alarm light and alarm tones are
cleared and the alarm messages change to prompt messages; and “C” indicates only alarm tone is disabled, but
alarm light and alarm message remain presented.

 The “L” column

column indicates the alarm level: “H” rrefers
efers to high
high,, “M” refers to medium, and “L” refers to low. “*” means
the alarm level is user-adjustable.

 XX represents a measurement or parameter label, such as ECG, NIBP, HR, PVCs, RR, SpO2, PR, etc.

In the “Cause and solution” column, corresponding solutions are given instructing you to troubleshoot problems. If the
problem persists, contact your service personnel.

D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages

Measurement Alarm Message L Cause and solution
XX XX Too High M* XX value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below the low
XX Too Low M* alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the patient
category and alarm limit settings are correct.
ECG Asystole H Arrhythmia has occurred to the patient. Check the patient’s
V-Fib/ V-Tach H condition and the ECG connections.
Vent. Brady H
Extreme Tachy H
Extreme Brady H
Brady M*
Tachy M*
R on T M*
PVC M*
VT>2 M*
Couplet M*
Bigeminy M*
 Trigeminy M*
Missed Beats M*
Vent. Rhythm M*
Multif. PVC M*

D-1

Measurement Alarm Message L Cause and solution

Nonsus. Vtac M*
Pause M*
Irr. Rhythm M*
PNP M* The pacer appears
appears abnormal. Che
Check
ck the pacer
pacer..
PNC M*
Resp Resp Apnea H The respiration signal was so weak that the equipment cannot
perform respiration
respiration analysis. Check the patient’s condition and the
Resp connections.
SpO2 SpO2 Desat H The SpO2 value has fallen below the desaturation alarm limit. Check
the patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are
correct.
No Pulse L The pulse signal was so weak that the equipment cannot perform
pulse analysis. Check the patient’s condition, SpO 2 sensor and
measurement
measurement site.
CO2 CO2 Apnea H The patient stops breathing, or the respiration signal was so weak
that the equipment cannot perform respiration analysis. Check the
patient’s condition, CO2 accessories and airway connections.

D.2 Technical Alarm Messages

Measurement Alarm Message L I Cause and solution
XX XX SelfTest Err H C An error occurred to the XX module, or there is a problem
XX Init Err H C with the communications between the module and the host.
XX Comm Err L C Restart the equipment.

XX Comm Stop H C
XX Overrange L C The measured XX value is not within the specified range for
XX measurement. Contact your service personnel.
ECG ECG Lead Off L* B The ECG electrode
electrode has be
become
come detached
detached from the
the patient or
ECG YY Lead Off L* B the lead wire has become disconnected from the trunk cable.
(YY represents the Check the connection of the electrodes and leadwires.
leadwires V, LL, LA, and
RA, as per AHA standard,
or C, F, L and R as per IEC
standard.)
Pads/Paddles off L* B The pads/paddles have been detached from the patient or
the therapy cable is loose. Check that the pads/paddles and
therapy cable are properly connected.
ECG Noise L A The ECG signal is noisy. Check for any possible sources of
signal noise form the area around the cable and electrode,
 and check the patient for excessive motion.
ECG Signal Invalid L A ECG amplitude is so low that ECG signal is undetectable.
Check for any possible source of interference from the area
around the cable and electrode; check the patient’s condition.

D-2

Measurement Alarm Message L I Cause and solution

Temp Temp Cal. Err L C A calibration failed
failed.. Restart the e
equipment.
quipment.
T1 Sensor Off L A The Temp sensor
sensor has become detached from
from the patient or
T2 Sensor Off L A the module. Check the sensor connections.
SpO2 SpO2 Sensor Off L* B The SpO2 sensor has become detached from the patient or
SpO2 Sensor Fault L C the module, or there is a fault with the SpO2 sensor, or an
SpO2 No Sensor L B unspecified SpO2 sensor has been used. Check the sensor
SpO2 Unknow Sensor L C application site and the sensor type, and make sure the

SpO2 Sensor L C sensor is not damaged. Reconnect the sensor or use a new

Incompatible sensor.

SpO2 Too Much Light L C There is too much light on the SpO2 sensor. Move the sensor
to a place with lower level of ambient light or cover the
sensor to minimize the ambient light.
l ight.
SpO2 Low Signal L C The SpO2 signal
signal is too low or too weak. Check
Check the patient’s
patient’s
SpO2 Weak Signal L C condition and change the sensor application site. If the error
SpO2 Weak Pulse L C persists, replace the sensor.
SpO2 Low Perf L B
SpO2 Interference L C The SpO2 signal has been interfered. Check for any possible
sources of signal noise form the area around the sensor, and
check the patient for excessive motion.
SpO2 Non-Pulsatile L C
SpO2 Board Fault L C There is a problem with the SpO2 measurement board. Do not
use the module and contact your service personnel.
NIBP NIBP Loose Cuff L A The NIBP cuff is not properly connected, or
or there is a leak in
NIBP Air Leak L A the airway.
NIBP Pneumatic Leak L A Check the NIBP cuff and pump for leakages.
NIBP Cuff Type Wrong L A The cuff type applied mismatches the patient category. Verify
the patient category and replace the cuff.
NIBP Air Press. Err L A An error occurred to the air pressure. Verify that the

equipment application site meets the environmental

requirements
requirements and check if there is any source that affects the
air pressure.
NIBP Weak Signal L A The patient’s pulse is weak or the cuff is loose. Check the
patient’s condition and change the cuff application site. If the
problem persists, change the cuff.
NIBP Sig. Saturated L A The NIBP signal is saturated due to excess motion or other
sources.
NIBP Overrange L A The patient’s NIBP value may be beyond the specified
measurement range.
NIBP Excessive Motion L A Check the patient’s condition and reduce the patient motion.
NIBP Cuff Overpress L A The NIBP airway may be occluded. Check the airway and
 measure again.
NIBP Equip Err H A An error occurred during NIBP measurement and therefore
NIBP Time Out L A the equipment cannot perform analysis correctly. Check the
NIBP Measure Failed L A patient’s condition and NIBP connections, or replace the cuff.

D-3

Measurement Alarm Message L I Cause and solution

NIBP Reset For Err L A An illegal reset occurred during NIBP measurement.
measurement. Check if
the airway is occluded.
IBP YY Sensor Off L A Check the sensor connection and reconnect the sensor.
(YY represents an IBP
label.)

CO2 CO2 Sensor High Temp L C Check, stop using or replace the sensor.
CO2 Sensor Low Temp L C Check, stop using or replace the sensor.
CO2 High Airway Press. L C An error occurred in the airway pressure. Check the patient
CO2 Low Airway Press. L C connection and patient circuit. Restart the equipment.
CO2 High Barometric L C Verify that the equipment application site meets the
CO2 Low Barometric L C environmentall requirements and check if there is any source
environmenta
that affects the air pressure. Restart the equipment.
CO2 Occlusion L C The airway or watertrap was occluded. Check the airway and
remove the occlusion.
CO2 No Watertrap L B Check the watertrap connections.

Normalization failed L C Check the CO2 connections. After the sensor’s temperature
becomes stabilized, perform a normalization again.
CO2 Hardware Err L C An error occurs to the power supply, gas pump or T-piece.
Restart the equipment.
CO2 Purging… L C An error occurred to the airway. Check the airway.
CO2 Pump Err L C There is a problem with the gas pump. Check, clean or replace
the CO2 module.
CO2 Sensor Fault L C There is a problem with the transducer. Check, clean or
replace the CO2 transducer.
CO2 Check Adapter L A There is a problem with the airway adapter. Check, clean or
replace the airway adapter.
CO2 Tubing Err L C Check if there is a leak in the CO2 sample line or the CO2
sample line has been occluded.

CO2 Zero Failed L A Check the CO2 connections. After the sensor’s temperature
CO2 Cal Fail L A becomes stabilized, perform a zero calibration again.
CO2 System Err L A Re-plug the module or restart the equipment.
CO2 Check Cal. L C Perform a calibration.
CO2 Check Airway L C An error occurred to the airway.
CO2 No Tubing L A Make sure that the sample line is connected.
CO2 Change Sensor L C There is a problem with the CO2 module. Re-plug the module
or restart the equipment.

Main control No Fan L C Make sure that the fan is connected.

system No Speaker L C Make sure that the speaker is connected.
No Data Card L C Make sure that the CF card is in place or format the CF card.
Power Board Comm Err H C An error occurred to the power board, or there is a problem
 Power Board Comm Err H C
Measurement Alarm Message
Keyboard Comm Err
Therapy Module Comm
Err
Main Control Selftest Err
RT Clock Need Reset
RT Clock Err
Data Card Err
Last User Test Failed
Last Auto Test Failed
Power board Power System Selftest Err
Power Board Volt Err
Low Battery
No Battery
Battery 1 Err
Battery 2 Err
Battery Depleted! System
will shut shown
imminently. Connect to
AC Mains or Replace
Battery.
Battery 1 Aged
Battery 2 Aged
Battery 1 failed charging
Battery 2 failed charging
Therapy module
module Therapy Equip selftest Err
Defib Malfunction
An error occurred to the power board, or there is a problem
with the communications between the power board and the
host. Restart the equipment.
D-4
L I Cause and solution
L C An error occurred to the keypad board, or there is a problem
with the communications between the keypad board and the
host. Restart the equipment.
S C An error occurred to the therapy module, or there is a
problem with the communications between the therapy
module and the host. Restart the equipment. If the problem
persists, contact your service personnel.
H C The main control voltage is abnormal. Replace the main
control board.
L C Reset system time.
H C An error occurred to the RTC chip, or the button cell is
depleted. Replace corresponding part.
L C There is a problem with the data card. Check or replace the
data card if necessary.
L C Run a succesful user test.
L C Run a succesful user test again.
H C An error occurred to the system power supply. Restart the
L C equipment.
S C Change battery or connect the equipment to the AC power
source to charge the batteries.
L C Battery is not installed. Install the battery.
H There is a problem
problem with the batteries. Che
Check
ck the batterie
batteriess for
H C damage; verify that correct batteries are used. Replace the
batteries if necessary.
S C Connect the equipment to AC mains.
L C Replace the battery.
L C
M C Battery failure or power board hardware failure. Replace the
M C battery. If the problem persists, contact your service
personnel.
S C An error o
occurred
ccurred during
during therapy module self te
test.
st. Restart the
equipment or replace the therapy module low voltage board.
S C The defibrillation function fails or both the defibrillation and
pacing functions fail. Restart the equipment and test
defibrillation function. If the problem persists, contact your
service personnel.
 Pacer Malfunction! S C The pacing function fails. Restart the equipment and test
pacer function. If the problem persists, contact your service
personnel.

D-5

Measurement Alarm Message L I Cause and solution

Disarming Failed H C There is a problem with the therapy module disarming circuit.
Replace the therapy module low voltage board and high
voltage board.
Monitoring Mornitor Module Selftest H C An error occurred during MPM module power-on self test.
module Err Replace the MPM module.

Mornitor Module Reset H C MPM module reset abnormally. In this case, the MPM module
Err restores to default configuration. You can ignore this
problem.
Mornitor Module Voltage L C The voltage of MPM module is abnormal. Replace the MPM
Err module.
Recorder Recorder Init Err L A Restart the equipment.

Recordhead Overheated L A The recorder has been working for a prolonged time. Clear
the recording tasks and resume the recording till the
recorder’s
recorder’s print head cools down.
Recorder Overcurre
Overcurrent
nt L A Re-load the recorder paper.
Others Load Config Err L A Check if the configuration is correct, or restore the factory
configuration.
Pacer Pads cable Off H C Check that pads cable is properly connected.
Pads Off H C Check that pads are properly connected.
ECG Lead Off H C Check that ECG leadwires are properly connected.
Pacer Stopped H C Check paddles. Check that pads well contact with patient’s
Abnormally skin. Make sure pads are properly applied, and then start
pacing again.

Note: In the “L” column “S” refers to special technological alarm. The special technological alarms cannot be paused or
silenced, and the alarm volume is unchangeable
unchangeable.. These alarms stops only when the alarm condition is eliminated.
 D-6

E Electrical Safety Inspection

The following electrical safety tests are rrecommend
ecommended
ed as part of a co
comprehensiv
mprehensive
e preven
preventive
tive maintenance
maintenance program.
program.
They are a proven m
means
eans of dete
detecting
cting abnormalities that, if undete
undetected,
cted, could prove dangerous to
to either the patient or
the operator. Additional tests may be required according to local regulations.

All tests can be performed by using commercially available safety analyzer test equipment. These procedures assume
the use of a 601PROXL International Safety Analyzer or equivalent safety analyzer. Other popular testers complying with
IEC 60601-1 used in Europe, such as Fluke, Metron or Gerb, may require modifications to the procedure. Please follow the
instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.

The electrical safety

safety inspection shou
should
ld be periodica
periodically
lly performed per year.
year. The safety analyzer
analyzer also proves
proves to be
be an
excellent troubleshooting
troubleshooting tool to detect abnormalities of line voltage and grounding
grounding,, as well as total current loads.

E.1 Power Cord Plug

Test Item Acceptance Criteria
The power
power plug pins No broken or bent pin. No discolored
discolored pins.
The plug body No physical damage
damage to the plug body
body..
The power
power plug No physical damage to the strain relief. No plug warmth for
The strain relief
relief
device in use.
The power
power plug No loose con
connections.
nections.
No physical damage to the cord. No deterioration to the
cord.
For devices with detachable power cords, inspect the
The power
power cord
connection at the device.
For devices with non-detachable power cords, inspect the
strain relief at the device.
 E-1

E.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories

E.2.1 Visual Inspection
Test Item Acceptance Criteria
No physical damage to the enclosure and accessories.

No physical damage to meters, switches, connectors, etc.

The enclosure and accessorie
accessoriess No residue of fluid spillage (e.g., water, coffee, chemicals,
etc.).
No loose or missing parts (e.g., knobs, dials, terminals, etc.).

E.2.2 Contextual Inspection

Test Item Acceptance Criteria
No unusual noises (e.g., a rattle inside the case).
No unusual smells (e.g., burning or smoky smells, particularly
The enclosure and accessori
accessories
es
from ventilation holes).
No taped notes that may suggest device deficiencies or
operator concerns.

E.3 Device Labelling

Check the labels provided by the manufacturer or the healthcare facilities are present and legible.

 Main unit label

 Integrated
Integrated warning labels

E.4 Protective Earth Resistance

1. Plug the probes of tthe
he analyze
analyzerr into the device’s pr
protective
otective earth term
terminal
inal and pro
protective
tective ea
earth
rth terminal
terminal of the AC
power cord.

2. Test the earth resistance with a current

current of 25 A.

3. Verify the resistance is less than limits.

LIMITS
For all countries, R = 0.2 Ω Maximum
 E-2

E.5 Earth Leakage Test

Run an Earth Leakage test on the device being tested before performing any other leakage tests.

The following outlet cond

conditions
itions apply when performing the Earth Leakage te
test:
st:

 normal polarity (Normal Condition)

 reverse polarity (Normal Condition)

 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

LIMITS
For UL60601-1,

 300 μA in Normal Condition

 1000 μA in Single Fault Condition

For IEC60601-1,

 500 μA in Normal Condition

 1000 μA in Single Fault Condition

E.6 Patient Leakage Current

Patient leakage currents
currents are measured between a selected applied part and mains earth. All measurements have a true
RMS only

The following outlet cond

conditions
itions apply when performing the Patient Leakage C
Current
urrent te
test.
st.

 normal polarity (Normal Condition)


reverse polarity (Normal Condition)
 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

 normal polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition)

 reverse polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition)

LIMITS

For CF applied parts

 10μA in Normal Condition

 50μA in Single Fault Condition

 For BF applied parts
 100μA in Normal Condition

 500μA in Single Fault Condition

E-3

E.7 Mains on Applied Part Leakage

The Mains on Applied
Applied Part test applies a test vo
voltage,
ltage, which is 110% of the main
mainss voltage, through a limiting
limiting resistan
resistance,
ce,
to selected applied part terminals. Current measurements
measurements are then taken between the selected applied part and earth.
Measurements
Measurements are taken with the test voltage (110% of mains) to applied parts in the normal and reverse polarity

conditions

The following
following outlet co
conditions
nditions apply whe
when
n performing the Mains on Applied P
Part
art test.

 Normal Polarity

 Reversed Polarity

LIMITS

 For CF applied parts: 50 μA

 For BF applied parts: 5000 μA

E.8 Patient Auxiliary Current

Patientt Auxiliary currents are measured between any selected Applied Part connector and the remaining Applied Part
Patien
connector s. All measurements may have a true RMS only response.

The following
following outlet co
conditions
nditions apply whe
when
n performing tthe
he Patien
Patientt Auxiliary Curr
Current
ent test.

 normal polarity (Normal Condition)

 reverse polarity (Normal Condition)

 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition)

 normal polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition)

 reverse polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition)

LIMITS

For CF applied parts,

 10μA in Normal Condition

 50μA in Single Fault Condition

For BF applied parts,

 100μA in Normal Condition

 500μA in Single Fault Condition

 NOTE
 Make sure the safety analyzer is authorized comply with requirement of IEC61010-1.

 Follow the instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.

E-4

F Symbols and Abbreviations

F.1 Units
µA microampere

µV microvolt

A ampere

Ah ampere hour

bpm beat per minute

bps bit per second

ºC centigrade

cc cubic centimeter

cm centimeter

dB decibel
DS dyne second

ºF fahrenheit

g gram

GHz gigahertz

GTT gutta

h hour

Hz hertz

in inch

J Joule

k kilo

kg kilogram

kPa kilopascal

L litre

lb pound

m meter

mAh Milliampere hour

Mb mega byte

mcg microgram

mEq milli-equivalents

mg milligram
 min minute

ml milliliter

mm millimeter

F-1

mmHg millimeters of mercury

ms millisecond

mV millivolt

mW milliwatt

MΩ megaohm

nm nanometer
rpm breaths per minute

s second

V volt

VA volt ampere

Ω ohm

W watt

F.2 Symbols
– negative, minus
% percent

/ per; divide; or

+ plus

= equal to

< less than

> greater than

≤ less than or equal to

≥ greater than or equal to

± plus or minus

× multiply
© copyright

F.3 Abbreviations and Acronyms

AaDO2 alveolar-arterial oxygen gradient
AAMI Association for Advancem
Advancement
ent of Medical Instrumentation
Instrumentation
AC alternating current
ACI acceleration
acceleration index
Adu adult
AG anaesthesia gas
AED Semi-automated external defibrillation
Semi-automated
AHA American Heart Association
ANSI American National Standard Institute
Ao aortic pressure

F-2

Art arterial
aVF left foot augmented lead
aVL left arm augmented lead
aVR right arm augmented lead
awRR airway respiratory rate
BAP brachial aterial pressure

BIS bispectral index

BP blood pressure
BPSK binary phase shift keying
BSA body surface area
BT blood temperature
BTPS body temperature and pressure, saturated
C.I. cardiac index
C.O. cardiac output
CaO2 arteriall oxygen content
arteria
CCO continuous cardiac output
CCU cardiac (coronary) care unit
CE Conformité Européenne

CIS clinical information system

CISPR International Special Committe
Committee
e on Radio Interferenc
Interference
e
CMOS complementary
complementar y metal oxide semiconductor
semiconduc tor
CMS central monitoring system
CO2 carbon dioxide
COHb carboxyhemoglobin
CP cardiopulmonary
CPR Cardiopulmonary resuscitatio
resuscitation
n
CVP central venous pressure
DC direct current
Defib defibrillation
Des desflurane
Dia diastolic
DPI dot per inch
DVI digital video interface
ECG electrocardiograph
EDV end-diastolic volume
EEC European Economic Community
EEG electroencephalogram
EMC electromagnetic
electromagnetic compatibility
EMG electromyograph
EMI electromagnetic
electromagnetic interference
Enf enflurane
 ESU electrosurgical
electrosurgical unit
Et end-tidal
EtCO2 end-tidal carbon dioxide
EtN2O end-tidal nitrous oxide
EtO ethylene oxide

F-3

EtO2 end-tidall oxygen

end-tida
FAP femoral arteria
arteriall pressure
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administrat
Administration
ion
Fi fraction of inspired
FiCO2 fraction of inspired carbon oxygen

FiN2O fraction of inspired nitrous oxide

FiO2 fraction of inspired oxygen
FPGA field programmable gate array
FV flow-volume
Hal halothane
Hb hemoglobin
Hb-CO carbon mono-xide hemoglobin
HbO2 oxyhemoglobin
HIS hospital information system
HR heart rate
I:E inspiratory-expiratory
inspiratory-expiratory ratio
IBP invasive brood pressure

ICG impedance cardiography

ICP intracranial pressure
ICT/B intracranial catheter tip pressure transducer
ICU intensive care unit
ID identification
IEC International Electrotechnic
Electrotechnical
al Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IP internet protocol
Iso isoflurane
IT injectate temperature
LA left arm
LAP left atrial pressure
Lat lateral
LCD liquid crystal display
LCW left cardiac work
LCWI left cardiac work index
LED light emitting diode
LL left leg
LVDS low voltage differential signal

LV
LVET
ET left ventricular ejection time

LVSW left ventricular stroke work

LVSWI left ventricular stroke work index
MAC minimal alveolar concentr
concentration
ation
MAP mean arterial pressure
MDD Medical Device Directive
MetHb methemoglobin
MRI magnetic resonance imaging

F-4

MVe expiratory
expirator y minute volume
MVi inspiratory
inspirator y minute volume
N/A not applied
Neo neonate

NIBP noninvasive blood pressure

NIP negative inspirat

inspiratory
ory pressure

O2 oxygen

O2CI oxygen consumpti

consumption
on index

O2R oxygen extraction ratio

OR operating room

oxyCRG oxygen cardio-res

cardio-respirogram
pirogram

PA pulmonary
pulmonar y arter
arteryy

Paw airway pressure

PAWP pulmonary
pulmonar y arter
arteryy wedge pressure

PD photodetector

Ped pediatric

PEEP positive end expiratory pressure

PEF peak expiratory flow

PEP pre-ejection period

PIF peak inspiratory flow

PIP peak inspiratory pressure

Pleth plethysmogram

Pmean mean pressure

PNC pacer not captured

PNP pacer not paced

Pplat plateau pressure

PR pulse rate

PVC premature ventricula

ventricularr complex
PVR pulmonary vascular resistance

PVRI pulmonary vascular resistance index

R right

RA right arm

RAM random access memory

RAP right atrial pressure

Raw airway resistance

Rec record, recording

Resp respiration

RHb reduced
reduced hemoglobin
 RL right leg
RM respiratory mechanics

RR respiration rate
RSBI rapid shallow breathing index

F-5

SaO2 arterial oxygen saturation

SEF spectral edge frequency
Sev sevoflurane
SFM self-maintenance
SI stroke index
SMR satellite module rack

SpO2 arterial oxygen saturation from pulse oximetry

SQI signal quality index
SR suppression ratio
STR systolic time ratio
SV stroke volume
SVR systemic vascular resistance
SVRI systemic vascular resistance index
Sync synchronization
Sys systolic pressure
Taxil axillary temperature
temperature
TD temperature
temperature differ
difference
ence
Te
Temp
mp temperature
temperature
TFC thoracic fluid content
content
TFI thoracic fluid index
index
TFT thin-film technology
technology
Toral
Toral oral temperature
temperature
Trect rectal temperature
temperature
TVe expiratory tidal
tidal volume
TVi inspiratory tidal volume
UAP umbilical arterial pressure
UPS uninterruptible
uninterrupt ible power supply
USB universal serial bus
UVP umbilical venous pressure
VAC volts alternatin
alternatingg current
VEPT volume of electrically participating tissue
VI velocity index
WOB work of breathing
 F-6

G Device Tracking
In order to provide high quality product and perform better service, we are going to track our product. Please contact us
with the device tracking information when you have received your defibrillator/monitor:

Please fill the information in the next page, cut the table and fax it to +86 755 26582934. You
You can also email your
information to service@mindray.com
service@mindray.com..
 G-1

FOR YOUR NOTES

 G-2

e
t
a
D
n
o
it
ry
t all
n a
u t
o s
C n I

n
o
it
a e
d
m
r
o
C
t
of n s
o
.
o
n
o
it l
o e
nI
it
a
P
/
p
N
x a d
o
i a
rm
g m
r Z F
o
M
ni
of n
f
I
n
k I e
c r
e
c i
a
r
s
U
v
e
D
T
e
ci
v
e
D

reb
m
u
n
l
e a
t
a ri
t e
S S

e
e m
a n s
m n o s e
a s
 t
N n r
e re a
m
r e d n
e m s
s tP . d t
m
o rt e
c
a o
A
li
c
u
t a r t N d
s p d y n l a
u e d ti o e m ro
C D A C C T E P